CP1 e

Cat. No.
W479-E1-09
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1E-ESD-
CP1E-NSD-
CP1E-ED-
CP1E-ND-
CP1E-NAD-
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware
USER’S MANUAL
NOTE
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Neverthe-
less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages
resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Copyrights
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1E-NSD-
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware
User’s Manual
Revised January 2016
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing a SYSMAC CP-series CP1E Programmable Controller.
This manual contains information required to use the CP1E. Read this manual completely and be sure
you understand the contents before attempting to use the CP1E.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical sys-
tems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities
Applicable Products
 CP-series CP1E CPU Units

• Basic Models CP1E-E(S)D-
A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such as
basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions.
• Application Models CP1E-N/NA(S)D-
An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals, invert-
ers, and servo drives.
The CP Series is centered around the CP1H, CP1L, and CP1E CPU Units and is designed with the
same basic architecture as the CS and CJ Series.
Always use CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units when expanding I/O
capacity. I/O words are allocated in the same way as for the CPM1A/CPM2A PLCs, i.e., using fixed
areas for inputs and outputs.
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 1

CP1E CPU Unit Manuals
Information on the CP1E CPU Units is provided in the following manuals.
Refer to the appropriate manual for the information that is required.
This Manual
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware CP1E CPU Unit Software CP1E CPU Unit Instructions
User’s Manual(Cat. No. W479) User’s Manual(Cat. No. W480) Reference Manual(Cat. No. W483)
Mounting and
1 Setting Hardware
· Names and specifications of the parts of all Units
· Basic system configuration for each CPU Unit
· Connection methods for Expansion I/O Units
and Expansion Units
2 Wiring
· Wiring methods for the power supply

· Wiring methods between external I/O devices
and Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
Connecting
3 Online to the PLC
Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

Support Software CX-Programmer Support Software
4 Software Setup
Software setting methods for the CPU
Units (PLC Setup)
5 Creating the Program

· Program types and basic information Detailed information on
· CPU Unit operation programming instructions
· Internal memory
· Built-in CPU functions
· Settings
Checking and
6 Debugging Operation
· Checking I/O wiring, setting the Auxiliary Area
settings, and performing trial operation
· Monitoring and debugging with the
Maintenance and CX-Programmer
7 Troubleshooting
Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs
2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

Manual Configuration
The CP1E CPU manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables. Refer to the appro-
priate section in the manuals as required.
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W479)

(This Manual)
Section Contents
Section 1 Overview and Specifica- This section gives an overview of the CP1E, describes its features, and
tions provides its specifications.
Section 2 Basic System Configura- This section describes the basic system configuration and unit models
tion and Devices of the CP1E.
Section 3 Part Names and Functions This section describes the part names and functions of the CPU Unit,
Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units in a CP1E PLC .
Section 4 Programming Device This section describes the features of the CX-Programmer used for pro-
gramming and debugging PLCs, as well as how to connect the PLC
with the Programming Device by USB.
Section 5 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire CP1E Units.
Section 6 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur
with a CP1E PLC, including the error indications provided by the CP1E
Units.
Section 7 Maintenance and Inspec- This section describes periodic inspections, the service life of the Bat-
tion tery, and how to replace the Battery.
Section 8 Using Expansion Units This section describes application methods for Expansion Units.
and Expansion I/O Units
Appendices The appendices provide information on dimensions, wiring diagrams,
and wiring serial communications for the CP1E.
CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480)

Section Contents
Section 1 Overview This section gives an overview of the CP1E, describes its application
procedures.
Section 2 CPU Unit Memory This section describes the types of internal memory in a CP1E CPU
Unit and the data that is stored.
Section 3 CPU Unit Operation This section describes the operation of a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Programming Concepts This section provides basic information on designing ladder programs
for a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 5 I/O Memory This section describes the types of I/O memory areas in a CP1E CPU
Unit and the details.
Section 6 I/O Allocation This section describes I/O allocation used to exchange data between
the CP1E CPU Unit and other units.
Section 7 PLC Setup This section describes the PLC Setup, which are used to perform basic
settings for a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 8 Overview and Allocation This section lists the built-in functions and describes the overall applica-
of Built-in Functions tion flow and the allocation of the functions.
Section 9 Quick-response Inputs This section describes the quick-response inputs that can be used to
read signals that are shorter than the cycle time.
Section 10 Interrupts This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP1E PLCs,
including input interrupts and scheduled interrupts.

Section Contents
Section 11 High-speed Counters This section describes the high-speed counter inputs, high-speed
counter interrupts, and the frequency measurement function.
Section 12 Pulse Outputs This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control,
jogging, and origin searches.
Section 13 PWM Outputs This section describes the variable-duty-factor pulse (PWM) outputs.
Section 14 Serial Communications This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals
(PTs) without using communications programming, no-protocol commu-
nications with general components, and connections with a Modbus-
RTU Easy Master, Serial PLC Link, and host computer.
Section 15 Analog I/O Function This section describes the built-in analog function for NA-type CPU
Units.
Section 16 Built-in Functions This section describes PID temperature control, clock functions, DM
backup functions, security functions.
Section 17 Ethernet Option Board This section gives an overview of the Ethernet Option Board, describes
its setting methods, I/O memory allocations, troubleshooting, how to
connect the CX-Programmer, and how to install an Ethernet network.
Section 18 Analog Option Board This section describes an overview of the Analog Option Board,
describes its installation and setting methods, memory allocations, star-
tup operation, refresh time, troubleshooting and how to use the Analog
Option Board.
Section 19 Operating the Program- This section describes basic functions of the CX-Programmer, such as
ming Device using the CX-Programmer to write ladder programs to control the CP1E
CPU Unit, to transfer the programs to the CP1E CPU Unit, and to debug
the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide lists of programming instructions, the Auxiliary
Area, cycle time response performance, PLC performance at power
interruption.
CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

Section Contents
Section 1 Summary of Instructions This section provides a summary of instructions used with a CP1E CPU
Unit.
Section 2 Instruction This section describes the functions, operands and sample programs of
the instructions that are supported by a CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 3 Instruction Execution This section provides the execution times for all instructions used with a
Times and Number of Steps CP1E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Monitoring and Comput- This section describes how to monitor and calculate the cycle time of a
ing the Cycle Time CP1E CPU Unit that can be used in the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide a list of instructions by Mnemonic and ASCII
code table for the CP1E CPU Unit.

Manual Structure
Page Structure and Icons
The following page structure and icons are used in this manual.
5 Installation and wiring

Level 1 heading
Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading 5-2 Installation Level 3 heading
Gives the current
Level 3 heading 5-2-1 Installation Location
headings.
DIN Track Installation
Step in a procedure 1
5-2 Installation
Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to release
them, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
Indicates a step in a
procedure.
DIN Track mounting pins
5 Page tab
Release Gives the number
5-2-1 Installation Location

2 Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching the top of the Units on the Track and then of the section.
pressing in at the bottom of the Units, as shown below.
DIN Track
3 Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in place.
Special Information
(See below.)
Icons are used to indicate
precautions and
additional information. DIN Track mounting pins
Precautions for Correct Use

Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
M4: 1.2 N·m
M3: 0.5 N·m
Manual name CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 5-3
This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual.
Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:
Precautions for Safe Use
Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.
Additional Information
Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier.

Terminology and Notation
Term Description
E-type CPU Unit A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such
as basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions.
Basic models of CPU Units are called “E(S)-type CPU Units” in this manual.
The models of E(S)-type CPU Units are shown below.
N-type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals,
inverters, and servo drives.
Application models of CPU Units are called “N(S)-type CPU Units” in this manual.
The models of N(S)-type CPU Units are shown below.
CP1E-NSD-
CP1E-NS1D-
NA-Type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports built-in analog and connections to Pro-
grammable Terminals, inverters, and servo drives.
Application models of CPU Units with built-in analog are called “NA-type CPU Units” in
this manual.
CX-Programmer A programming device that applies for programming and debugging PLCs.
The CX-Programmer includes the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer (CX-One Lite), the
CX-Programmer (CX-One) and the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
This manual describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC Edition
CX-Programmer version 9.03 or higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E.
“CX-Programmer” refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer version 9.03 or
higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E in this manual.
Note E20/30/40(S) and N20/30/40(S) CPU Units are supported by CX-Programmer
version 8.2 or higher. E10/14(S), N14/60(S) and NA20 CPU Units are supported
by CX-Programmer version 9.03 or higher. E60S CPU Units are supported by CX-
Programmer version 9.42 or higher.

Sections in this Manual
2
1 Overview and Specifications
2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

4
3 Part Names and Functions

5
4 Programming Device 6
7
5 Installation and Wiring
8
6 Troubleshooting
A
7 Maintenance and Inspection
8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
A Appendices

CONTENTS
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1
CP1E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2
Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5
Terms and Conditions Agreement......................................................................... 12
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 14
Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 19
Operating Environment Precautions..................................................................... 22
Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 23
Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24
Section 1 Overview and Specifications

1-1 CP1E Overview ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1-1-1 Overview of Features .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure .................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3 Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 1-9
1-3-1 General Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-9
1-3-2 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-3-3 Functional Specifications .......................................................................................................... 1-12
1-4 Difference between E/N/NA-type and E/NS(1)-type ............................................... 1-14
Section 2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

2-1 Basic System Configuration................................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E(S)-type CPU Unit .................................................. 2-2
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit......................................... 2-3
2-2 CPU Units ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-2-2 Optional Products........................................................................................................................ 2-9
2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units ....................................................................................................... 2-11
2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit ................................................................................. 2-13
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units ............................................................................................................. 2-13
2-3-2 Connection Methods ................................................................................................................. 2-13
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit ........................ 2-13
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units ................................................................................ 2-14
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration ....................................................................................... 2-16
2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External Power Supply Capacity .................................... 2-18
2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units are
Connected................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2-4-2 Current Consumption ................................................................................................................ 2-19

Section 3 Part Names and Functions
3-1 CPU Units ................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-1-1 E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units .......................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-2 E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units .................................................................... 3-7
3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications....................................................................................................... 3-13
3-1-4 Optional Serial Communications Port for N/NA(S)-type CPU Units ................................ 3-19
3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N/NA-type CPU Units.................................................................. 3-24
3-2 Expansion I/O Units............................................................................................................... 3-28
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit ................................................................................................................. 3-28
3-2-2 Expansion Output Units ............................................................................................................ 3-29
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units .................................................................................................................. 3-31
3-2-4 I/O Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 3-33
Section 4 Programming Device

4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP1E ......................................................................... 4-2
4-1-1 Applicable Programming Devices ............................................................................................... 4-2
4-1-2 CX-Programmer .......................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-1-3 Operating Environment and System Configuration..................................................................... 4-4
4-1-4 Features of the CX-Programmer................................................................................................. 4-4
4-1-5 Installing the Software................................................................................................................. 4-7
4-2 Connecting by USB ................................................................................................................. 4-8
4-2-1 Connecting by USB..................................................................................................................... 4-8
4-2-2 Installing the USB Driver ............................................................................................................. 4-9
4-3 Connection Method with a Serial Port ................................................................................. 4-16
Section 5 Installation and Wiring

5-1 Fail-safe Circuits...................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2 Installation................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5-2-1 Installation Location .................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-2-2 Unit Arrangement ........................................................................................................................ 5-6
5-2-3 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units ............................................................. 5-12
5-3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines ................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-3 I/O Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 5-17
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls ............................................................................................. 5-21
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods ................................................................................... 5-22
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors .......................................................................................... 6-2
6-1-1 Errors and Remedies .................................................................................................................. 6-2
6-1-2 Checking Errors .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status............................................................................................................ 6-3
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information.................................................................................................... 6-3
6-1-5 Types of Errors............................................................................................................................ 6-5
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart......................................................................................................... 6-6
6-1-7 No Operation When Power Is Supplied ...................................................................................... 6-7
6-1-8 Fatal Errors ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6-1-9 CPU Errors................................................................................................................................ 6-11
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors......................................................................................................................... 6-12
6-1-11 Other Errors .............................................................................................................................. 6-14

6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors................................................................................................. 6-15
6-2-1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15
6-2-2 Outputs...................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6-2-3 Built-in Analog ........................................................................................................................... 6-17
6-2-4 CX-Programmer Connection..................................................................................................... 6-18
Section 7 Maintenance and Inspection

7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection ................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections ................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 7-3
7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions.................................................................................................... 7-4
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units ...................................................... 7-5
Section 8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

8-1 Analog Input Units................................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions.......................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-3 Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8-1-4 Flow of Operation........................................................................................................................ 8-7
8-2 Analog Output Units.............................................................................................................. 8-15
8-2-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8-2-2 Part Names and Functions........................................................................................................ 8-15
8-2-3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
8-2-4 Flow of Operation...................................................................................................................... 8-20
8-3 Analog I/O Units..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units ...............................................................................................8-27
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units....................................................................... 8-40
8-4 Temperature Sensor Units.................................................................................................... 8-56
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units....................................................................... 8-56
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units................................................................................. 8-71
8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units ............................................................................................ 8-81
8-5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units ................................................................................................. 8-92
8-5-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 8-92
8-5-2 Part Names and Functions........................................................................................................ 8-92
8-5-3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-94
8-5-4 Flow of Operation...................................................................................................................... 8-94
Section A Appendices
A-1 Dimensions .............................................................................................................................A-2
A-1-1 CPU Units ...................................................................................................................................A-2
A-1-2 Option Boards .............................................................................................................................A-5
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units ....................................................................................................................A-8
A-1-4 Expansion Units ........................................................................................................................A-10
A-2 Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................................................................A-12
A-2-1 CPU Units .................................................................................................................................A-12
A-2-2 Expansion I/O Units ..................................................................................................................A-21
A-2-3 Expansion Units ........................................................................................................................A-28
A-2-4 Serial Communications .............................................................................................................A-39

A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications.......................................................................................A-44
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring .............................................................................................. A-44
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring........................................................................................ A-47
A-3-3 Converting the Built-in RS-232C Port to RS-422A/485 ............................................................ A-50
A-3-4 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring .......................................................................... A-53
Index ..................................................................................................................................Index-1
Revision History................................................................................ Revision-1

Terms and Conditions Agreement
Warranty, Limitations of Liability
Warranties
 Exclusive Warranty
Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workman-
ship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in
writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
 Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF
THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based
on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.
 Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally
shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-com-
plying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal
to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be
responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products
unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and
maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of
any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies
shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combi-
nation with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materi-
als or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc

OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on
which liability is asserted.

Application Considerations
Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations
which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At
Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings
and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a com-
plete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, sys-
tem, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take applica-
tion responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or
any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for
the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of
Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual perfor-
mance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or
when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; how-
ever, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

Safety Precautions
Definition of Precautionary Information
The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of a
CP-series PLC. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always
read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

WARNING if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

Caution if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury, or property damage.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation
and performance.
Symbols
The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including
warnings). The specific operation is shown in the triangle
and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for electric shock.
The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you

must not do. The specific operation is shown in the circle
and explained in text.
The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you

must do. The specific operation is shown in the circle and
explained in text. This example shows a general precau-
tion for something that you must do.

and explained in text. This example indicates a general
precaution.

and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for hot surfaces.

WARNING
Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied.
Doing so may result in electric shock.
Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied.
Doing so may result in electric shock.
Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Con-
troller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation.
Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety mea-
sures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error
or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. Unexpected opera-
tion, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control section, errors in I/O mem-
ory, and errors that cannot be detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a
countermeasure for all these errors, external safety measures must be provided to
ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output
relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such prob-
lems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-
circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF. As a
countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to
ensure safety in the system.
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event
of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
Serious accidents may result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not
provided.
Do not apply the voltage/current outside the specified range to this unit.
It may cause a malfunction or fire.

Caution
Be sure to sufficiently confirm the safety at the destination when you transfer
the program or I/O memory or perform procedures to change the I/O memory.
Devices connected to PLC outputs may incorrectly operate regardless of the operat-
ing mode of the CPU Unit.
With an E(S)-type CPU Unit or with an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit without a Bat-
tery, the contents of the DM Area (D) * , Holding Area (H), the Counter Present Val-
ues (C), the status of Counter Completion Flags (C), and the status of bits in the
Auxiliary Area (A) related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply
is turned ON.
*This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function.
If the DM backup function is being used, be sure to use one of the following methods
for initialization.
1. Clearing All Areas to All Zeros
Select the Clear Held Memory (HR/DM/CNT) to Zero Check Box in the Startup
Data Read Area in the PLC Setup.
2. Clearing Specific Areas to All Zeros or Initializing to Specific Values
Make the settings from a ladder program.
If the data is not initialized, the unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of
unstable data.
Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time.
Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC power supply section to the
torque specified in the user’s manual.
The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.
Do not touch the power supply section when power is being supplied or imme-
diately after the power supply is turned OFF.
The power supply section and I/O terminal blocks will be hot and you may be burned.

Caution
Pay careful attention to the polarities (+/-) when wiring the DC power supply.
A wrong connection may cause malfunction of the system.
When connecting the PLC to a computer or other peripheral device, either

ground the 0-V side of the external power supply or do not ground the external
power supply at all.
Otherwise the external power supply may be shorted depending on the connection
methods of the peripheral device. DO NOT ground the 24 V-side of the external
power supply, as shown in the following diagram.
Non-insulated DC
24V power supply
USB cable or other
communications
cable
0V 0V 0V
FG
FG CPU Unit FG Peripheral device FG

(e.g., personal computer)
The DM Area (D), Holding Area (H), Counter Completion Flags (C), and Counter
Present Values (C) will be held by the Battery if a Battery is mounted in a CP1E-
N/NA (S)D- CPU Unit. When the battery voltage is low, however, I/O mem-
ory areas that are held (including the DM, Holding, and Counter Areas) will be unsta-
ble. The unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of unstable data.
Use the Battery Error Flag or other measures to stop outputs if external out-
puts are performed from a ladder program based on the contents of the DM
Area or other I/O memory areas.
Sufficiently check safety if I/O bit status or present values are monitored in the
Ladder Section Pane or present values are monitored in the Watch Pane.
If bits are set, reset, force-set, or force-reset by inadvertently pressing a shortcut key,
devices connected to PLC outputs may operate incorrectly regardless of the operat-
ing mode.
Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when
using a word address or symbol for the offset.
For example, write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect
specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using
an input comparison instruction or other instruction.
If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address,
the system will access data in other area, and unexpected operation may occur.

Caution
Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor con-
nected to the Unit.
Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range does not
match the sensor.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for which tem-
perature ranges are given in the following table.
An incorrect setting may cause operating errors.

Observe the following precautions when using a CP-series PLC.
 Power Supply
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the user’s manuals. An incorrect voltage may
result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and fre-
quency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incor-
rect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring
may result in burning.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of the following. Not turning
OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units
• Mounting or dismounting Option Boards
• Setting rotary switches
• Connecting cables or wiring the system
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors
 Installation
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any
static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installation of the Unit may
result in malfunction.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, connectors, Option Boards, and other items with locking devices
are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
 Wiring
• Wire correctly according to specified procedures in this manual.
• Keep the wire cuttings out of the Unit when wiring.
• Always use the following size wire when connecting I/O terminals: AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to
0.82 mm2).
• When unpacking the Unit, check carefully for any external scratches or other damages. Also,
shake the Unit gently and check for any abnormal sound.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring.
Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not connecting to a ground
of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Leave the label attached to the top of the Unit when wiring to prevent the entry of foreign matter.
Removing the label may result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Keep foreign substances, such as wiring chips, from entering into the Units. It may cause a fire,
failure or malfunction. Take protective measures especially at the time of construction.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the
label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Connec-
tion of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages
may result in burning.

• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests. Not discon-
necting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
• Be sure that all the PLC terminal screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque
specified in the relevant manuals. The tightening torque for the terminals on the CP1W-
CIF11/CIF12 terminal block is 0.28 N·m Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• The following devices can be connected to pin 6 (+5V) on the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit or the RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01) mounted to the CPU Unit. Do not connect pin 6
to any other device.
• RS-422A CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter
• RS-232C / RS-422A NT-AL001 Conversion Adapter
• NV3W-M20L Programmable Terminal
• Use the cables that are specified in the manual for each device. External devices or the CPU Unit
may be damaged if a commercially available RS-232C computer cable is used.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing either of these may
break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may break the cables.
 Handling
• To initialize the DM Area, back up the initial contents for the DM Area to backup memory using
one of the following methods.
• Set the number of words of the DM Area to be backed up starting with D0 in the Number of CH
of DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area.
• Include programming to back up specified words in the DM Area to built-in EEPROM by turning
ON A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit).
• Check the ladder program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking
the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• The ladder program and parameter area data in the CP1E CPU Units are backed up in the built-in
EEPROM backup memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the
backup operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the
BKUP indicator is lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF and a memory error
will occur the next time the power supply is turned ON.
• With a CP1E CPU Unit, data memory can be backed up to the built-in EEPROM backup memory.
The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when backup is in progress. Do not turn
OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. If the power is turned OFF
during a backup, the data will not be backed up and will not be transferred to the DM Area in RAM
the next time the power supply is turned ON.
• Before replacing the battery, supply power to the CPU Unit for at least 30 minutes and then com-
plete battery replacement within 5 minutes. Memory data may be corrupted if this precaution is
not observed.
• The equipment may operate unexpectedly if inappropriate parameters are set. Even if the appro-
priate parameters are set, confirm that equipment will not be adversely affected before transfer-
ring the parameters to the CPU Unit.
• After replacing the CPU Unit, make sure that the required data for the DM Area, Holding Area,
and other memory areas has been transferred to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in
malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• Do not drop the Unit or subject the Unit to unusual vibration and shock. Do so may result in failure
or fire.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the startup operating mode).

• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct. Not doing so may
result in malfunction or burning.
• Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is being supplied in order
to prevent malfunction due to static electricity.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the Unit while data is being transferred.
• When transporting or storing Units or Board, static electricity can destroy LSIs or ICs. Cover the
PCBs with a conductive material and maintain the specified storage temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your bare hands. There are
sharp leads and other parts on the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Double-check the pin numbers when assembling and wiring the connectors.
• Never short-circuit the positive and negative terminals of a battery or charge, disassemble, heat,
or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks or deform the battery by
applying pressure. Doing any of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition
of the battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to
excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected to shock may leak if they are used.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.
• UL standards require that only an experienced engineer can replace the battery. Make sure that
an experienced engineer is in charge of battery replacement. Follow the procedure for battery
replacement given in this manual.
• The following precaution must be displayed on all products that contain a lithium primary battery
(containing at least 6 ppb of perchlorate) and that will be exported to or transported through the
State of California in the USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
A CP1W-BAT01 or CJ1W-BAT01 lithium primary battery (containing at least 6 ppb of perchlorate)
can be mounted in a CP1E-N/NAD- CPU Unit. Display the precaution given above on
your product’s packaging box or shipping box if the product contains a CP1W-BAT01 or CJ1W-
BAT01 Battery and is exported to or through the State of California in the USA.
• This product is EMC compliant when assembled in a complete PLC system. Refer to the applica-
ble manual for grounding, cable selection, and any other conditions for EMC compliance.
• This is a Class A product for use in industrial environments. In residential environments it may
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to
reduce interference.
 External Circuits
• Always configure the external circuits to turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the
control system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary
errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and
other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from
output terminals remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, tran-
sistors, and other elements.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned OFF and will maintain
their previous status when the PLC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM
mode. Make sure that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs.
(When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS instruction, all
outputs from PLC will be turned OFF and only the internal output status in the CPU Unit will be
maintained.)

Operating Environment Precautions
 Perform installation following the instructions in this manual
Follow the instructions in this manual to correctly perform installation.
 Do not operate the control system in the following locations

• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals
• Locations subject to shock or vibration
• Locations subject to direct rain fall
• Locations subject to direct strong UV
 Take countermeasures in the following locations

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
• Locations close to power supplies

Regulations and Standards
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
Concepts
 EMC Directives
OMRON devices are electrical components that are designed to be built into equipment and manu-
facturing systems. OMRON devices that comply with EMC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards*, so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine.
Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must
be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depend-
ing on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the
OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that
devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
* The applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standard is EN61131-2.
 Low Voltage Directive

Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the
required safety standards for the PLC (EN 61131-2).
 Conformance to EC Directives
The CP1E PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the
CP1E PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the PLC must be installed as follows:
• The CP-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
• CP-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to EN61131-2. Radiated emission
characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel
used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must there-
fore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
• A SYSMAC CP-series PLC is a class A product (for an industrial environment). In residential
areas it may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures to reduce interference.
Trademarks
SYSMAC is a registered trademark for Programmable Controllers made by OMRON Corporation.
CX-One is a registered trademark for Programming Software made by OMRON Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Other system names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.

Related Manuals
The following manuals are related to the CP1E. Use them together with this manual.
Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Contents
SYSMAC CP Series W479 CP1E-ESD- To learn the hard- Describes the following information for CP1E
CP1E CPU Unit Hard- CP1E-NSD- ware specifications PLCs.
ware User’s Manual of the CP1E PLCs • Overview and features
(this manual) CP1E-ED-
• Basic system configuration
• Part names and functions
• Installation and settings
• Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W480) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W480 CP1E-ESD- To learn the soft- Describes the following information for CP1E
CP1E CPU Unit Soft- CP1E-NSD- ware specifications PLCs.
ware User’s Manual of the CP1E PLCs • CPU Unit operation
• Internal memory
• Programming
• Settings
• CPU Unit built-in functions
• Interrupts
• High-speed counter inputs
• Pulse outputs
• Serial communications
• Analog I/O function
• Other functions
Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W479) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W483 CP1E-ESD- To learn program- Describes each programming instruction in
CP1E CPU Unit Instruc- CP1E-NSD- ming instructions in detail.
tions Reference Manual detail When programming, use this manual together
with the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Man-
CP1E-ND- ual (Cat. No. W480).
CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series W342 CS1G/H-CPUH To learn communi- Describes
Communications Com- CS1G/H-CPU-V1 cations commands 1) C-mode commands and
mands Reference Man- for CS/CJ/CP/NSJ- 2) FINS commands in detail.
ual CS1D-CPUH series Controllers in
CS1D-CPUS detail Read this manual for details on C-mode and
FINS commands addressed to CPU Units.
CS1W-SCU-V1
CS1W-SCB-V1 Note This manual describes commands addressed to CPU Units. It
CJ1G/H-CPUH does not cover commands addressed to other Units or ports (e.g.,
serial communications ports on CPU Units, communications ports
CJ1G-CPUP
on Serial Communications Units/Boards, and other Communica-
CJ1M-CPU tions Units).
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1W-SCU-V1
SYSMAC CP Series W461 CP1L-L10D- To learn the basic Describes the following information for
CP1L/CP1E CPU Unit CP1L-L14D- setup methods of the CP1L/CP1E PLCs.
Introduction Manual CP1L/CP1E PLCs • Basic configuration and component names
CP1L-L20D-
• Mounting and wiring
CP1L-M30D-
• Programming, data transfer, and debugging
CP1L-M40D- using the CX-Programmer
CP1L-M60D- • Application program examples
CX-Simulator Operation W366 CXONE-ALC-V4/ Operating procedures Describes the operating procedures for the
Manual ALD-V4 for CX-Simulator CX-Simulator.
Simulation Support
Software for Windows
computersUsing
simulation in the
CX-Programmer with
CX-Programmer

1
\
Overview and Specifications

This section gives an overview of the CP1E, describes its features, and provides its
specifications.
1-1 CP1E Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-1-1 Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3-2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-3 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-4 Difference between E/N/NA-type and E/NS(1)-type. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 1-1

1-1 CP1E Overview
1-1-1 Overview of Features
The SYSMAC CP1E Programmable Controller is a package-type PLC made by OMRON that is designed
for easy application. The CP1E includes E(S)-type CPU Units (basic models) for standard control
operations using basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions, and N/NA(S)-type CPU
Units (application models) that supports connections to Programmable Terminals, Inverters, and Servo
Drives.
Basic Models CP1E Application Models
NA-type
E(S)-type CPU Units N(S)-type CPU Units
CPU Units
CPU Unit with
CPU with 10, 14 CPU Unit with 30, 40 or CPU with 14 or CPU Unit with
30, 40 or 60 I/O
or 20 I/O Points 60 I/O Points 20 I/O Points 20 I/O Points
Points
Appearance E-type E-type N-type N/NA-type
ES-type ES-type NS(1)-type
I/O points E 10/14/20/30/40 N 14/20/30/40/60 20

ES 14/20/30/40/60 NS(1) 30/40/60
Program capacity 2K steps 8K steps
DM Area capacity 2K words 8K words
Of these 1,500 words can be written to the Of these 7,000 words can be written to the built-in
built-in EEPROM. EEPROM.
Mounting Expan- Not possible. 3 Units maximum Not possible. 3 Units maximum
sion I/O Units and
Expansion Units
Model with transis- Available (CPU Unit with 10 I/O points only) Available
tor outputs
Pulse outputs Not supported. Supported (Model with transistor outputs only)
Built-in serial com- Not provided. RS-232C port provided
munications port RS-485 port provided (NS1-type only)
Built-in analog Not available. Not available. Available
Option Board Not supported. Not supported. N/NA-type: Supported (for one
port)
NS(1)-type: Not Supported
Connection port for USB port USB port
Programming Device
Clock Not provided. Provided
Using a Battery Cannot be used. Can be used (sold separately).
Backup time of 50 hours at 25°C 40 hours at 25°C
built-in capacitor
Battery-free opera- Always battery-free operation. Battery-free operation if no battery is attached. Only
tion Only data in the built-in EEPROM will be retained data in the built-in EEPROM will be retained if power is
if power is interrupted for longer than 50 hours. interrupted for longer than 40 hours.
1-2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

1-1 CP1E Overview

For CP1E CPU Units, the following I/O memory area will be unstable after a power interruption.
• DM Area (D) (excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM function)
• Holding Area (H)
• Counter Present Values and Completion Flags (C)
• Auxiliary Area related to clock functions(A)
Mount the CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) to an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit if data in 1
the above areas need to be retained after a power interruption. A Battery cannot be mounted to
an E(S)-type CPU Unit.
1-1-2 Features
1-1-2 Features
 System Configuration
CP1E CPU Unit (An N-type CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points is shown here.)
CX-Programmer
USB port CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) Power supply and input terminals
(Can be mounted only to N/NA-type CPU Units.)
Expansion Units (Can be mounted to E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units)
Commercially NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
available USB IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
cable 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
Peripheral USB port

OUT OUT OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP CH EXP CH EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06
Analog adjuster
Built-in RS-232C port One slot for an Output terminal block

Option Board
Option Board
IP ADDRESS:
SUBNET MASK:
COMM ERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
One RS-232C port One RS-422A/485 port One Ethernet port Analog Option Board
RS-232C Option RS-422A/485 Option Ethernet Option Board CP1W-ADB21/DAB21V/MAB221
Board CP1W-CIF01 Board CP1W-CIF11/12 CP1W-CIF41 version 2.0 (Can be mounted only to N30/40/60 or
NA20 CPU Units version 1.2 or higher.)
(Note) The following Option Boards cannot be used.
·CP1W-DAM01 LCD Option Board
·CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board version 1.0
CP1E CPU Unit (An NS1-type CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points is shown here.)
CX-Programmer
CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately)

USB port (Can be mounted only to NS(1)-type Power supply and input terminals
CPU Units.) Expansion Units (Can be mounted to E30/40/60S or N30/40/60(1) CPU Units)
Commercially NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
available USB IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
cable 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
Peripheral USB port

OUT OUT OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP CH EXP CH EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
Built-in RS-232C port NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06
Built-in RS-485 port Output terminal block

Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.

Programming, Setting, and Monitoring with the CX-Programmer

The CX-Programmer is used as the Programming Device for the CP1E.
Easy Connection with Computers Using Commercially Available

USB Cables
The CX-Programmer is connected using a commercially available USB cable between the computer’s
USB port and the built-in peripheral USB port of the CP1E.
With E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units, Add I/O by

Connecting Expansion I/O Units
A total of up to three of the following Expansion I/O Units can be connected to an E30/40/60(S),
N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit. (The total of three Units must also include Expansion Units.)
24-input/16-output Unit, 32-output Unit, 12-input/8-output Unit, 16-output Unit, 8-input Unit, or 8-out-
put Unit
With E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units, Add Analog

I/O or Temperature Inputs by Connecting Expansion Units
With an E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit, a total of up to three of the following Expan-
sion Units can be connected. (The total of three Units must also include Expansion I/O Units.)
Analog I/O Unit, Analog Input Unit, Analog Output Unit, Temperature Sensor Units, CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
Quick-response Inputs
By setting a built-in input to quick-response input operation, inputs with signal widths as small as 50 µs
can be read with certainty regardless of the cycle time.
Up to six quick-response inputs can be used.
Quick-response signal to
photomicrosensor or other device
Built-in input I/O refresh

Cycle time
Input bit
Input bit
ON for one scan
in the next cycle
Cycle time
Can read ON signals
shorter than this time.
Note The user setting in the PLC Setup determines if each input is a quick-response input, normal input, interrupt
input, or high-speed counter input.

1-1 CP1E Overview

Input Interrupts
An interrupt task can be started when a built-in input turns ON or turns OFF .
Up to six interrupt inputs can be used.
Interrupt input
Built-in input
Interrupt task
1
Ladder program
Interrupt occurs
1-1-2 Features
END
Complete High-speed Counter Functionality

A high-speed counter input can be used by connecting a rotary encoder to a built-in input. A CP1E CPU
Unit is equipped with more than one high-speed counter input, making it possible to control devices for
multiple axes with a single PLC.
Built-in Inputs
(Functions can be assigned.)
High-speed Counter Inputs
E(S)-type CPU Units:

Increment pulse inputs: 10kHz × 6 counters
10kHz × 5 counters(only for 10 I/O points)
Up/down pulse inputs: 10kHz × 2 counters
Pulse + direction inputs: 10kHz × 2 counters
Differential phase inputs (4×): 5kHz × 2 counters
N/NA(S)-type CPU Units:
Increment pulse inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters, 10kHz × 4 counters
Up/down pulse inputs: 100kHz × 1 counter, 10kHz × 1 counter
Encoder Pulse + direction inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters
Differential phase inputs (4×): 50kHz × 1 counter, 5kHz × 1 counter
• High-speed counters can be used for high-speed processing, using either target value comparison or
range comparison with the counter’s PV to create interrupts.
An interrupt task can be started when the count reaches a specified value or falls within a specified
range.
• High-speed counter input frequency (speed) can be measured.
The input pulse frequency can be measured using the PRV instruction (counter 0 only).

Versatile Pulse Control for Transistor Output CPU Units

Fixed duty ratio pulse outputs can be output from the CPU Unit’s built-in outputs and used to perform
positioning or speed control with a servomotor or a stepping motor that accepts pulse inputs.
Two pulse outputs at 100 kHz are provided as standard features.
Stepping Motor
Servomotor
16 Built-in Outputs
(Functions can be assigned.) (See note.)
Two pulse outputs

100 kHz
Note The instruction used to control each output determines whether it is used as a normal output, pulse output,
or PWM output.
 Positioning is possible with Trapezoidal Acceleration and Deceleration

Trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration can be used for positioning using the PULSE OUTPUT
(PLS2) instruction.
 Jogging Can Be Performed

Jogging can be performed by executing the SPED or ACC instruction.
 Origin Searches and Origin Returns Can Be Performed Using the ORIGIN
SEARCH Instruction
An accurate origin search combining all I/O signals can be executed with a single instruction. It is
also possible to move directly to an established origin using the ORIGIN SEARCH (ORG) instruc-
tion.
PWM Outputs for Transistor Output CPU Units

Lighting and power control can be performed by outputting variable duty ratio pulse (PWM) output sig-
nals from the CPU Unit’s built-in outputs.
Built-in RS-232C Port for N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

The N/NA(S)-type CPU Units have one built-in RS-232C port as a standard feature.
Built-in RS-485 Port for NS1-type CPU Units

The NS1-type CPU Units have one built-in RS-485 port as a standard feature.

1-1 CP1E Overview

Mounting Serial Option Boards to N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units
One Serial Communications Option Board with one RS-232C port or one RS-422A/485 port can be
added to an N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit. With the serial communications port, it is easy to connect to
general components, such as barcode readers, and other components such as PTs, other CP-series
PLCs, and Inverters.
Note Serial Option Boards cannot be mounted to the NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
1
NS-series PT, Barcode Reader, etc.
1-1-2 Features
RS-232C
RS-422A/485 Option Board

with the CP1W-CIF11/12 mounted
RS-422A
Built-in RS-232C Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function
port
Example: Inverter
Serial PLC Links
CP1E, CP1H
CP1L, CJ1M
Built-in Analog for NA-type CPU Units

The NA-type CPU Units have analog functionality, with 2 analog voltage/current inputs and 1 analog
voltage/current output built in.
2 analog inputs
0 to 5V, 1 to 5V
0 to 10V, -10V to 10V
0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
L1 L2/ N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1
00 02 04 06 08 10 V IN0 COM 0 V IN1 COM 1
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUT0
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUT0 COM 0
1 analog output
0 to 5V, 1 to 5V
0 to 10V, -10V to 10V
Inverter, etc 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
• A range of applications is at a resolution of 6,000.

• Application is also possible for process-control sensor input or inverter control without using Expan-
sion I/O Units.

1-2 Basic Operating Procedure

In general, use the following procedure.
1. Setting Devices and Hardware

Connect the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units.
Set the DIP switches on the Option Board and Expansion Units as required.
Refer to Section 3 Part Names and Functions and Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP1E CPU Unit
Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W479).
2. Wiring
Wire the power supply, I/O, and communications.
Refer to Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W479).
3. Connecting Online to the PLC

Connect the personal computer online to the PLC.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Device in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W479).
4. I/O Allocations
Allocations for built-in I/O on the CPU Unit are predetermined and memory is allocated automatically
to Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units, so the user does not have to do anything.
Refer to Section 6 I/O Allocation in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480).
5. Software Setup
Make the PLC software settings.
With a CP1E CPU Unit, all you have to do is set the PLC Setup.
When using an E(S)-type CPU Unit or when using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit without a
Battery, be sure to consider selecting the Clear retained memory area (HR/DM/CNT) Check Box in
the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Settings.
Refer to 3-2-4 Initializing I/O Memory at Startup and Section 7 PLC Setup in the CP1E CPU Unit
Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480).
6. Writing the Programs

Write the programs using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Concepts in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480).
7. Checking Operation
Check the I/O wiring and the Auxiliary Area settings, and perform trial operation.
The CX-Programmer can be used for monitoring and debugging.
Refer to Section 8 Overview and Allocation of Built-in Functions in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W480).
8. Basic Program Operation

Set the operating mode to RUN mode to start operation.

1-3 Specifications
1-3 Specifications
1-3-1 General Specifications
The following table lists the general specifications of CP1E CPU Units.
Item AC power supply
CP1E-D-A
DC power supply
CP1E-D-D
1
Model
CP1E-S(1)D-A CP1E-S(1)D-D
Enclosure Mounted in a panel
1-3-1 General Specifications

Dimensions (H × D × W) E/N/NA-type
CPU Unit with 10 I/O points (CP1E-E10D-): 90mm*1 ×85mm*2 × 66mm
CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O points (CP1E-14/20D-): 90mm*1 ×85mm*2 × 86mm
CPU Unit with 30 I/O points (CP1E-30D-): 90mm*1 × 85mm*2 × 130mm
CPU Unit with 40 I/O points (CP1E-40D-): 90mm*1 × 85mm*2 × 150mm
CPU Unit with 60 I/O points (CP1E-N60D-): 90mm*1 × 85mm*2 × 195mm
CPU Unit with 20 I/O points and built-in analog (CP1E-NA20D-): 90mm*1 × 85mm*2 × 130mm
E/NS(1)-type
CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O points (CP1E-14D/20SD-): 90mm*1 ×78.6mm*2 × 86mm
CPU Unit with 30 I/O points (CP1E-30S(1)D-): 90mm*1 × 78.6mm*2 × 130mm
Weight CPU Unit with 10 I/O points (CP1E-E10D-): 300g max.
CPU Unit with 14 I/O points (CP1E-14(S)D-): 360g max.
CPU Unit with 20 I/O points (CP1E-20(S)D- ): 370g max.
CPU Unit with 30 I/O points (CP1E-30(S)D- ): 600g max.
CPU Unit with 40 I/O points (CP1E-40(S)D-): 660g max.
CPU Unit with 60 I/O points (CP1E-60(S)D-): 850g max.
CPU Unit with 20 I/O points and built-in analog (CP1E-NA20D- ): 680g max.
Electri- Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VDC
cal spec-
ifications Operating voltage range 85 to 264 VAC 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power consumption 15 VA/100 VAC max. 9W max. (CP1E-E10D-D)
(CP1E-10/14/20(S)D-A)
25 VA/240 VAC max. 13W max. (CP1E-N14/20D-D)
50 VA/100 VAC max. (CP1E-NA20D-A 20W max. (CP1E-NA20D-D
70 VA/240 VAC max. CP1E-30/40/60(S)D-A) CP1E-N30/40/60(S)D-D) *4
Inrush current 120 VAC, 20 A for 8 ms max. for cold start at room temperature 24 VDC, 30A for 20 ms max. for cold start at room temperature
240 VAC, 40 A for 8 ms max. for cold start at room temperature
External power supply *3 Not provided. (CP1E-10/14/20(S)D-A) Not provided.
24 VDC, 300 mA (CP1E-NA20D-A
CP1E-30/40/60D-A
CP1E-30/40/60S(1)DR-A)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between the external AC ter- Except between DC primary current and DC secondary
minals and GR terminals current
Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC 50/60Hz for 1 min between AC external and Except between DC primary current and DC secondary
GR terminals leakage current: 5 mA max. current
Power interrupt time 10 ms min. 2 ms min.
Applica- Ambient operating temper- 0 to 55°C
tion envi- ature
ronment Ambient humidity 10% to 90%
Atmosphere No corrosive gas.
Ambient storage temperature -20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Pollution degree 2 or less: Conforms to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2.
Noise resistance 2 kV on power supply line (Conforms to IEC61000-4-4.)
Overvoltage category Category II: Conforms to JIS B3502 and IEC 61131-2.
EMC immunity level Zone B
Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS 60068-2-6.
5 to 8.4 Hz with 3.5-mm amplitude, 8.4 to 150 Hz
Acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 for 100 min in X, Y, and Z directions (10 sweeps of 10 min each = 100 min total)
Shock resistance Conforms to JIS 60068-2-27.
147 m/s2, 3 times in X, Y, and Z directions
Terminal block Fixed (not removable)
Terminal screw size M3
Applicable standards Conforms to EC Directives.
Grounding method Ground to 100Ω or less.
*1 Total of 110 mm with mounting brackets.

*2 Excluding cables.
*3 Use the external power supply to power input devices. Do not use it to drive output devices.
*4 This is the rated value for the maximum system configuration. Use the following formula to calculate power consumption for CPU Units with DC power.
Formula: DC power consumption = (5V current consumption × 5 V/70% (internal power efficiency) + 24V current consumption) × 1.1(current fluctuation factor)
The above calculation results show that a DC power supply with a greater capacity is required.
*5 The general specifications of the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are measured under the same conditions as the CPU Units.

1-3-2 Characteristics
The following table gives the characteristics of CP1E CPU Units.
Item CP1E-NAD-
CP1E-ESD- CP1E-NS(1)D-
Program capacity 2K steps (8 KB) including the symbol table, comments, 8K steps (32 KB) including the symbol table, com-
and program indices of the CX-Programmer ments, and program indices of the CX-Programmer
Control method Stored program method
I/O control method Cyclic scan with immediate refreshing
Program language Ladder programs
Instructions Approximately 200
Processing speed Overhead process- 0.4 ms
ing time
Instruction execu- Basic instructions: 1.19 µs
tion times Special instructions: 7.9 µs
Number of CP1W-series Expansion I/O CP1E-10/14/20(S)D-: None
Units and Expansion Units connected CP1E-30/40/60(S)D-/NA20D-: 3 units
Maximum number of I/O points CP1E-E10D- : 10
CP1E-14(S)D-: 14
CP1E-20(S)D-: 20
CP1E-30(S)D-: 150 (30 built in, 40 × 3 expansion)
CP1E-NA20D- : 140 (20 built in, 40 × 3 expansion)
Built-in I/O CP1E-E10D- : 10 (6 inputs, 4 outputs)
CP1E-14(S)D-: 14 (8 inputs, 6 outputs)
CP1E-20(S)D-: 20 (12 inputs, 8 outputs)
CP1E-30(S)D-: 30 (18 inputs, 12 outputs)
CP1E-NA20D- : 20 (12 inputs, 8 outputs)
Built-in High-speed High-speed Incremental Pulse Inputs Incremental Pulse Inputs
input counters counter 10 kHz: 6 counters 100 kHz: 2 counters,10 kHz: 4 counters
func- mode/maximum 5 counters (only for 10 I/O points) Up/Down Inputs
tions frequency Up/Down Inputs 100 kHz: 1 counters,10 kHz: 1 counters
10 kHz: 2 counters Pulse + Direction Inputs
Pulse + Direction Inputs 100 kHz: 2 counters
10 kHz: 2 counters Differential Phase Inputs (4x)
Differential Phase Inputs (4x) 50 kHz: 1 counter, 5 kHz: 1 counter
5 kHz: 2 counters
Counting mode • Linear mode
• Ring mode
Count value 32 bits
Counter reset • Phase Z and software reset (excluding increment pulse input)
modes • Software reset
Control method Target Matching
Range Comparison
Input interrupts 6 inputs (4 inputs only for 10 I/O points)
Interrupt input pulse width: 50 µs min.
Quick-response Inputs 6 inputs (4 inputs only for 10 I/O points)
Input pulse width: 50 µs min.
Normal Input constants Delays can be set in the PLC Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms).
input Set values: 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms
Built-in Pulse out- Pulse output Pulse output function not included Pulse + Direction Mode
output puts method and out- 1 Hz to 100 kHz: 2 counters
func- (Models with put frequency
tions transistor Output mode • Continuous mode (for speed control)
outputs • Independent mode (for position control)
only)
Number of out- • Relative coordinates: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
put pulses hex (0 to 2147483647)
• Absolute coordinates: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex (-2147483647 to 2147483647)
Acceleration/ Trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration (Cannot
deceleration perform S-curve acceleration and deceleration.)
curves
Changing SVs Only target position can be changed.
during instruc-
tion execution
Origin searches Included
PWM out- Frequency PWM output function not included 2.0 to 6,553.5 Hz (in increments of 0.1 Hz) with 1
puts output or 2 Hz to 32,000 Hz (in increments of 1 Hz)
(Models with 1 output
with transis- Duty factor 0.0% to 100.0% (in increments of 0.1%)
tor outputs Accuracy: +1%/-0% at 2 Hz to 10,000 Hz and
only) +5%/-0% at 10,000 Hz to 32,000 kHz
Output mode Continuous Mode
Built-in analog Analog input Analog function not included Setting range: 0 to 6,000 (2 channels only for NA-type)
Analog output Setting range: 0 to 6,000 (1 channel only for NA-type)
Analog adjusters E/N/NA-type CPU Units: 2 adjusters (Setting range: 0 to 255)
E/NS(1)-type CPU Units: None
Commu- B-type peripheral USB port Conforming to USB 2.0 B-type connector
nica- Transmission 5 m max.
tions distance

CP1E-ED- CP1E-ND-
Item CP1E-NAD-
1-3 Specifications
CP1E-ESD- CP1E-NS(1)D-
Communica Built-in RS-232C port No built-in RS-232C port Interface: Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
tions Communica- Half duplex
tions method
Synchronization Start-stop
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Transmission 15 m max.
distance
Supported • Host Link
protocol • 1:N NT Link
• No-protocol mode
• Serial PLC Links (master, slave)
• Modbus-RTU Easy Master 1
Built-in RS-485 port No built-in RS-485 port N30/40/60S1-type only
Interface: Conforms to EIA RS-485
Communica- Half duplex
1-3-2 Characteristics
tions method
Synchronization Start-stop
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Transmission 50 m max.
distance
Supported pro- • Host Link
tocol • 1:N NT Link
• Modbus-RTU Easy Master
Serial option port Option Board cannot be mounted. 1 port (Option Board can be mounted only to
N30/40/60 and NA20 CPU Units.)
Mountable • One RS-232C port:
Option Boards CP1W-CIF01 (Half duplex, Start-stop)
• One RS-422A/485 port (not isolated):
CJ1W-CIF11 (Half duplex, Start-stop)
• One RS-422A/485 port (isolated):
CP1W-CIF12 (Half duplex, Start-stop)
• One Ethernet port:
CP1W-CIF41 version 2.0(100Base-TX)
• One Analog Option Board:
CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V (Can be
mounted only to N30/40/60 and NA20 CPU Units
version 1.2 or higher.)
Communica- Depends on Option Board.
tions method
Synchronization Depends on Option Board.
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Compatible • Host Link
protocols • 1:N NT Link
• Modbus-RTU Easy Master
Number of tasks 17
• One cyclic task
• One scheduled interrupt task (always interrupt task 1)
• Six input interrupt tasks (interrupt tasks 2 to 7)
• Sixteen high-speed counter interrupt tasks (interrupt tasks 1 to 16)
Maximum subroutine number 128
Maximum jump number 128
Scheduled interrupt tasks 1 interrupt task
Clock Clock function not included. Included.
The time of error occurrence displays 01-01-01 Accuracy (monthly deviation):-4.5 min to -0.5 min at
01:01:01 Sunday. ambient temperature of 55ºC
-2.0 min to +2.0 min at ambient temperature of 25ºC
-2.5 min to +1.5 min at ambient temperature of 0ºC
Memory backup Built-in EEPROM Ladder programs and parameters are automatically saved to built-in EEPROM
A section of the Data Memory Area can be saved to the built-in EEPROM.
Battery backup Battery cannot be mounted. CP1W-BAT01 can be used.

*With CP1W-BAT01 Bat- Maximum battery service life: 5 years
tery (optional) Backup Time
Guaranteed value (ambient temperature: 55ºC):
13,000 hours (approx. 1.5 years)
Effective value (ambient temperature: 25ºC): 43,000
hours (approx. 5 years)
CIO Area Input Bits 1,600 bits (100 words): CIO 0.00 to CIO 99.15 (CIO 00 to CIO 99)
Output Bits 1,600 bits (100 words): CIO 100.00 to CIO 199.15 (CIO 100 to CIO 199)
Serial PLC Link Words 1,440 bits (90 words) : CIO 200.00 to CIO 289.15 (CIO 200 to CIO 289)
Work Area (W) 1,600 bits (100 words): W0.00 to W99.15 (W0 to W99)
Holding Area (H) 800 bits (50 words): H0.00 to H49.15 (H0 to H49)
Bits in this area maintain their ON/OFF status when operating mode is changed.
Auxiliary Area (A) Read-only: 7,168 bits (448 words) (A0 to A447)
Read/write: 4,896 bits (306 words) (A448 to A753)
Temporary Area (TR) 16 bits: TR0 to TR15
Timer Area (T) 256 timer numbers (T0 to T255 (separate from counters))
Counter Area (C) 256 counter numbers (C0 to C255 (separate from timers))
Data Memory Area (D) 2K words: D0 to D2047 8K words: D0 to D8191
Of these, 1,500 words can be saved to the Of these, 7,000 words can be saved to the backup
backup memory (built-in EEPROM) using settings memory (built-in EEPROM) using settings in the
in the Auxiliary Area. Auxiliary Area.
Operating modes PROGRAM Mode: Program execution is stopped.
Preparations can be executed prior to program execution in this mode.
MONITOR Mode: Programs are executed.
Some operations, such as online editing, and changes to present values in I/O mem-
ory, are enabled in this mode.
RUN Mode: Programs are executed.
This is the normal operating mode.

1-3-3 Functional Specifications

The following table gives the functional specifications of CP1E CPU Units.
Function Description
Cycle time Minimum cycle time Makes the cycle time consistent.
manage- Cycle time monitoring Monitors the cycle time.
ment
CPU Unit Inputs High- High-speed pulse High-speed pulses from devices such as a rotary encoder are counted. The
built-in speed inputs counted values are stored in the Auxiliary Area.Interrupt tasks can be exe-
functions counters cuted when target is reached or by range comparison.
inputs Input pulse fre- The frequency of pulses input by the PRV instruction is measured.
quency measurement
Interrupt inputs Relevant interrupt tasks are executed during the cycle when the CPU Unit
built-in inputs turn ON or turn OFF.
Quick-response inputs Inputs can be read without being affected by cycle time.
Use the quick-response inputs to read signals shorter than the cycle time.
Normal I/O Cyclic The CPU Unit’s built-in I/O are cyclically refreshed.
inputs refres refreshing
hing Immediate I/O refreshing by immediate refreshing instructions.
refreshing
Input response times Input constants can be set for Basic I/O Units.
The response time can be increased to reduce the effects of chattering and
noise at input contacts. The response time can be decreased to enable detect-
ing shorter input pulses.
Outputs Pulse out- Pulse control A pulse signal is output and positioning or speed control is performed with a
puts (Mod- servo driver that accepts a pulse input.
els with Continuous mode for speed control or independent mode for position control
transistor can be used. There are functions for changing to positioning during speed con-
outputs trol and for changing the target value during positioning.
only ) Origin positioning Origin searches and origin returns.
PWM outputs (Models with transis- Pulses for which the duty ratio (ratio between ON time and OFF time during
tor outputs only ) one pulse cycle) can be set are output.
Normal Load OFF function All of the outputs on the CPU Unit’s I/O can be turned OFF when an error
outputs occurs in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Built-in analog Analog input Convert analog signal into digital value range from 0 to 6,000.
Analog output Convert digital value range from 0 to 6,000 into analog signal.
Expansion Functions sup- I/O refresh- Cyclic refreshing The Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are cyclically refreshed.
I/O Units ported by both ing Refreshing by IORF I/O refreshing by IORF instruction.
and Expansion I/O Unit
Expansion and Expansion Unit Load OFF function All of the outputs on Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are turned OFF
Units (0000 hex) when an error occurs in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Expansion I/O Units Input response times The response time can be increased to reduce the effects of chattering and
noise at input contacts.
The response time can be decreased to enable detecting shorter input pulses.
Expansion Units Unit error detection Errors in Expansion Units are detected.
The CPU Unit is notified that the Expansion Unit stopped due to an error.
Memory Holding I/O memory when changing operating modes The status of I/O memory can be held when the operating mode is changed.
manage- The forced-set/reset status can be held when the operating mode is changed .
ment func- Automatic backup to the backup memory Automatic backup of ladder programs and parameter area to the backup mem-
tions (built-in EEPROM) ory (built-in EEPROM).
Communi- Peripheral USB port Peripheral bus (toolbus) For communications with programming device (CX-Programmer).
cations Serial port (N/NA-type only) −
Host Link (SYSWAY) communications Host Link commands can be sent from a PT or a computer to read/write I/O
memory, and perform other operations for PLC.
No-protocol communications I/O instructions for communications ports (TXD/RXD instructions) can be used
for data transfer with peripheral devices such as bar code readers.
NT Link communications I/O memory in the PLC can be allocated and directly linked to various PT func-
tions, including status control areas, status notification areas, touch switches,
lamps, memory tables, and other objects.
Serial PLC Links Up to 10 words of data per Unit can be shared between up to nine CPU Units
(one polling unit and eight polled units).
* A PT cannot be conneected.
Modbus-RTU Easy Master function Modbus-RTU commands are sent by the Modbus-RTU Master function. Mod-
bus slaves, such as inverters, can be easily controlled with serial communica-
tions.
Interrupt Scheduled interrupts Tasks can be executed at a specified interval (1.0 ms min., Unit: 0.1 ms).
Input interrupts Interrupt tasks are processed when the built-in input turns ON or OFF.
High-speed counter interrupts This function counts input pulses with the CPU Unit’s built-in high-speed
counter and executes an interrupt task when the count reaches the preset
value or falls within a preset range (target value or zone comparison).

Function Description
Power Memory protection Holding Area data, DM Area data, Counter Completion Flags, and Counter
1-3 Specifications
supply Present Values are held even when power is turned OFF.
manage- This function is valid only when an optional battery is mounted.
ment Number of power interruptions counter The number of times power has been interrupted is counted.
Debugging Online editing The program can be changed during operation in MONITOR mode or PRO-
GRAM mode.
Force-set/reset Specified bits can be set or reset.
Differentiate monitoring ON/OFF changes in specified bits can be monitored.
Storing the stop position at errors The location and task number where execution stopped for a program error is
recorded.
Program check The programs can be checked for items such as no END instruction and 1
FALS/FAL errors at startup.
Self-diag- Error Log Details and the time of occurance of error codes predefined by the CPU Unit
nosis and are stored.
1-3-3 Functional Specifications

restoration CPU error detection CPU Unit WDT errors are detected.
User-defined failure diagnosis Errors can be generated for user-specified conditions:Non-fatal errors (FAL)
and fatal errors (FALS).
Load OFF function The built-in outputs, Expansion I/O Unit outputs, and Expansion Unit outputs
are turned OFF.
Non-fatal error System FAL error detection This function generates a non-fatal (FAL) error when the user-defined condi-
detection (User-defined non-fatal error) tions are met in program.
Backup memory error detection This function detects when data in the backup memory (built-in EEPROM) that
stores the ladder program is corrupted.
PLC Setup error detection This function detects setting errors in the PLC Setup.
Option Board errors This function detects when the Option Board is malfunctioning or discon-
nected.
Battery error detection This function detects when the battery voltage is low or the battery is discon-
(N/NA(S)-type CPU Units only) nected.
* This function is valid only when a battery is mounted and the Do not detect
battery error Check Box is cleared in the PLC Setup.
Built-in analog errors (NA-type CPU This function detects built-in analog I/O errors.
Units only)
Fatal Error Detec- Memory error detection This function detects errors that occur in memory of the CPU Unit.
tion I/O bus error detection This function detects errors that occur during data transfer between the CPU
Unit and another Unit.
Detection of too many I/O points This function detects when more than the maximum number of CP1W Expan-
sion I/O Units and Expansion Units are connected to the PLC.
Program error detection This function detects when there is an error in the program.
See the following for details.
Instruction processing error This function detects an error when the given data value is invalid when exe-
detection cuting an instruction, or execution of instruction between tasks was attempted.
Indirect DM addressing BCD This function detects an error when an indirect DM/EM address in BCD mode
error is not BCD.
Illegal area access error detec- This function detects an error when an attempt is made to access an illegal
tion area with an instruction operand.
No END error detection This function detects an error when there is no END instruction at the end of
the program.
Task error detection The execution condition for an interrupt task was met but there is no interrupt
task with the specified number.
Differentiation overflow error This function detects an error when too many differentiated instructions are
detection entered or deleted during online editing (131,072 times or more).
Invalid instruction error detec- This function detects an error when an attempt is made to execute an instruc-
tion tion that is not defined in the system.
User program area overflow This function detects an error when instruction data is stored after the last
error detection address in user program area.
Cycle time exceeded error detec- This function monitors the cycle time (10 to 1,000 ms) and stops the operation
tion when the set value is exceeded.
System FALS error detection This function generates a fatal (FALS) error when the user-defined conditions
(user-defined fatal error) are met in program.
Mainte- Automatic online connection via network This function enables automatically connecting to the PLC online when the
nance CX-Programmer is directly connected by a serial connection (peripheral USB
port or serial port).
Security Read protection using password This function protects reading and displaying programs using passwords.
functions Read protection: Set a password using the CX-Programmer.
* Overwrite protection function not included.
Write protection from FINS commands This function prohibits writing by using FINS commands sent over the network.

1-4 Difference between E/N/NA-type

and E/NS(1)-type
The differences among functions other than appearances of E/N/NA-type CPU Units and
E/NS(1)-type CPU Units are as follows.
Refer to A-1 Dimensions for the dimensions.
E-type CPU Units
 Difference in Characteristics and Functions

Function E-type ES-type
Analog adjusters 2 adjusters None
(Setting range: 0 to 255) The analog adjuster PV in A642/A643 is fixed
on 0000.
 Product Lineup
E CPU Unit ES CPU Unit
Transistor outputs Transistor outputs
Relay outputs Relay Outputs
(sinking/sourcing) (sinking/sourcing)
Power
AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC
supply
10 I/O points     − − − −
14 I/O points  − − −  − − −
20 I/O points  − − −  − − −
30 I/O points  − − −  − − −
40 I/O points  − − −  − − −
60 I/O points − − − −  − − −

1-4 Difference between E/N/NA-

type and E/NS(1)-type
N-type CPU Units
 Difference in Characteristics and Functions

Function N/NA-type NS(1) -type
Analog adjusters 2 adjusters None
(Setting range: 0 to 255) The analog adjuster PV in A642/A643 is
fixed on 0000. 1
Built-in RS-232C port 6 signals are supported: SD, RD, RS, CS, 4 signals are supported: SD, RD, RS and
DR and ER. CS.
DR (pin 7) and ER (pin 8) are not sup-
ported.
Signal Signal
Pin Abbr. Signal Pin Abbr. Signal
direction direction
1 FG Frame ground − 1 FG Frame ground −
2 SD(TXD) Send data Outputs 2 SD(TXD) Send data Outputs
3 RD(RXD) Receive data Inputs 3 RD(RXD) Receive data Inputs
4 RS(RTS) Request to send Outputs 4 RS(RTS) Request to send Outputs
5 CS(CTS) Clear to send Inputs 5 CS(CTS) Clear to send Inputs
6 5V Power − 6 5V Power −
7 DR(DSR) Data set ready Inputs 7 NC − −
Data terminal 8 NC − −
8 ER(DTR) Outputs
ready 9 SG(0V) Signal ground −
9 SG(0V) Signal ground − Connector
FG Frame ground −
Connector hood
FG Frame ground −
hood
Option board 1 port (N30/40/60, NA20 CPU Unit only) Cannot be mounted
The following option boards can be There is no slot for an option board.
mounted.
RS-232C Option Board
CP1W-CIF01
CP1W-CIF11/12
Ethernet Option Board
CP1W-CIF41
Analog Option Board
CP1W-ADB21/DAB21V/MAB221
Built-in RS-485 port None 1 port (N30/40/60S1 CPU Unit only)
With 2-wire connections, it can only com-
municate in half duplex.
Terminating resistance ON/OFF can be
set by DIP switch.
COM allocation CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 correspond CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 correspond
(Transistor outputs with different common terminals. with the same common terminal.
only)
NC 00 01 02 V+ 00 01 02
NC COM COM COM 03 V- COM(V-) COM 03
CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01
are different COM. are the same COM.

Function N/NA-type NS(1) -type

Power supply for tran- Not needed Needed
sistor outputs Do not connect an external power supply. It is necessary to connect a DC24V exter-
(Transistor outputs nal power supply when using terminals 00
only) and 01 on terminal block CIO 100. Do not
connect the external power supply to the
terminals except 00 and 01 on terminal
block CIO 100.
Wiring Example Wiring Example
Sinking outputs Sinking outputs
External power supply
L L
L L
NC 00 01 02
NC COM COM COM 03 V+ 00 01 02
V- COM(V-) COM 03
Sourcing outputs Sourcing outputs

External power supply
L L
L L
NC 00 01 02
V+ 00 01 02
NC COM COM COM 03
V- COM(V+) COM 03
 Product Lineup
N CPU Unit NS CPU Unit NS1 CPU Unit
RS-232C+1 option slot(*) Built-in RS-232C Built-in RS-232C+RS-485
Transistor Transistor Transistor
Relay outputs Relay outputs Relay outputs
outputs (sinking/ Outputs (sinking/ Outputs (sinking/
sourcing) sourcing) sourcing)
Power
AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC
supply
10 I/O points − − − − − − − − − − −
14 I/O points    − − − − − − − −
20 I/O points    − − − − − − − −
30 I/O points     − −   − − 
40 I/O points     − −   − − 
60 I/O points     − −   − − 
* Only N30/40/60 has option slot.

Ü
Basic System Configuration and 2

Devices
This section describes the basic system configuration and device models of the CP1E.
2-1 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E(S)-type CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-2 Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-3-2 Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or
Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External Power Supply Capacity . . . . . . 2-18
2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or
Expansion Units are Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-4-2 Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2-1 Basic System Configuration

This section describes the system configurations using E(S)-type and N/NA(S)-type CP1E
CPU Units.
2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E(S)-type CPU Unit

The system configuration when using a CP1E E(S)-type CPU Unit is shown below.
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units Expansion Units DIN Track
CP1E-E30DR-
20 or 40 I/O Points Analog I/O
CP1E-E40DR-
Support Software Personal computer
CX-Programmer 8 inputs Analog inputs
IBM PC/AT or equivalent
8 outputs Analog outputs
16 outputs Temperature sensors
CP1E-E30SDR- 32 outputs CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

CP1E-E40SDR-
CP1E-E60SDR-
Up to 3 Units can be connected
When a two level layout is created by expansion and distance is required
Expansion Units and I/O Connecting Cable

CP1E-E10D-
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units
CP1E-E14DR-
CP1E-E20DR-
CP1W-CN811
CP1E-E14SDR-
CP1E-E20SDR-

Mount the CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) to an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit if
data in the above areas need to be retained after a power interruption. A Battery cannot be
mounted to an E(S)-type CPU Unit.

2-1 Basic System Configuration

2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit
The system configuration when using a CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit is shown below.
Battery
CP1W-BAT01
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units Expansion Units DIN Track
2
CP1E-N30D- 20 or 40 I/O Points Analog I/O
Support Software
Personal computer CP1E-N40D-
CX-Programmer
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit

CP1E-N60D-
IBM PC/AT or equivalent 8 inputs Analog inputs
CP1E-NA20D-
8 outputs Analog outputs
16 outputs Temperature sensors

Programmable
Terminal (PT) 32 outputs CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
CP1E-N30S(1)D-
CP1E-N40S(1)D-
(NT Link/Host Link)
CP1E-N60S(1)D-
Up to 3 Units can be connected
Note Neither the CP1W-DAM01 LCD Option Board nor the CP1W-CIF41
General component Inverter Ethernet Option Board version 1.0 can be used.
* Analog Option Board can be mounted only to N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU
Units version 1.2 or higher.
RS-232C RS-422A/485 Ethernet Analog *

Option Board Option Board Option Board Option Board
(No-protocol mode) CP1W-CIF01 Or CP1W-CIF11 Or CP1W-CIF41 Or CP1W-ADB21
(Modbus-RTU)
CP1W-CIF12 (version 2.0 or higher) CP1W-DAB21V
CP1E-N14D- CP1W-MAB221
CP1E-N20D- COMM COMM
IP ADDRESS:
SUBNET MASK:
CP-series PLC or
CJ1M PLC Host computer COMM ERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
When a two level layout is created by expansion and distance is required

Expansion Units and
(Host Link) CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units I/O Connecting Cable
(Serial PLC Link)
CP1W-CN811

Mount the CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) to an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit if
data in the above areas need to be retained after a power interruption. A Battery cannot be
mounted to an E(S)-type CPU Unit.

2-2 CPU Units

This section describes the models of CP1E CPU Units.
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models

The CP1E CPU Unit model numbers are configured as shown below.
Power supply
A: AC power supply
CP1E-D- D: DC power supply
Output type
R: Relays outputs
T: Transistor outputs, sinking
T1: Transistor outputs, sourcing
Input type
D: DC inputs
Unit type
None: Standard type
S: Renewal type
S1: Renewal type with built-in RS-485 port
I/O capacity
10: 10 I/O points (6 inputs, 4 outputs)
Unit type
E: Basic model
N: Application model
NA: Application model with built-in analog
The following is a list of available CP1E CPU Unit models.

ES-type CPU Units

Number of built-in I/O Current
points Power Pro- consumption
supply Output gram DM Area
Name and appearance Model number Num- Num- Weight
specifica- type capac- capacity 24
2-2 CPU Units

Total ber of ber of 5 VDC
tions ity VDC
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points CP1E-E14SDR-A 14 8 6 AC power Relays 2K steps 2K words 0.16A 0.07A 350g max.
supply 100
to 240
VAC
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CP1E-E20SDR-A 20 12 8 0.17A 0.08A 360 max.

CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points CP1E-E30SDR-A 30 18 12 0.17A 0.07A 590g max.
Note A battery cannot be mounted to an E-type CPU Unit.

E-type CPU Units

points Power consumption
Pro-
supply DM Area
Name and appearance Model number Number Number Output type gram Weight
specifica- capacity
Total of of capacity 5 VDC 24 VDC
tions
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points CP1E-E10DR-A 10 6 4 AC power Relays 2K steps 2K words 0.08A 0.04A 300g max.
CP1E-E10DT-A supply 100 Sinking tran- 0.11A 0.00A 280g max.
to 240 VAC sistor
CP1E-E10DT1-A Sourcing 0.11A 0.00A 280g max.
E
transistor
CP1E-E10DR-D DC power Relays 0.08A 0.04A 280g max.
CP1E-E10DT-D supply Sinking tran- 0.11A 0.00A 260g max.
24VDC sistor
CP1E-E10DT1-D Sourcing 0.11A 0.00A 260g max.
transistor
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points CP1E-E14DR-A 14 8 6 AC power Relays 0.16A 0.07A 350g max.
supply 100
to 240 VAC
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CP1E-E20DR-A 20 12 8 0.17A 0.08A 360g max.
Note A battery cannot be mounted to an E-type CPU Unit.

NS(1)-type CPU Units

Pro-
supply DM Area
specifica- capacity
capacity
2-2 CPU Units

Total of of 5 VDC 24 VDC
tions
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points CP1E-N30SDR-A 30 18 12 AC power Relays 8K steps 8K words 0.21A 0.07A 600g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
CP1E-N30SDT-D DC power Sinking tran- 0.27A 0.02A 485g max.
sistor
supply
CP1E-N30SDT1-D
24VDC
Sourcing 2
transistor

CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points CP1E-N30S1DR-A 30 18 12 AC power Relays 0.21A 0.07A 600g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
CP1E-N30S1DT-D DC power Sinking tran- 0.27A 0.02A 485g max.
sistor
supply
CP1E-N30S1DT1-D 24VDC Sourcing
transistor
CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points CP1E-N40SDR-A 40 24 16 AC power Relays 0.21A 0.09A 660g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
sistor
supply
CP1E-N40SDT1-D Sourcing
24VDC
transistor
supply
100 to
240 VAC
sistor
supply
CP1E-N40S1DT1-D Sourcing
24VDC
transistor
CPU Unit with 60 I/O Points CP1E-N60SDR-A 60 36 24 AC power Relays 0.21A 0.13A 850g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
sistor
supply
CP1E-N60SDT1-D 24VDC Sourcing
transistor
supply
100 to
240 VAC
supply sistor
CP1E-N60S1DT1-D 24VDC Sourcing
transistor

N-type CPU Units

Pro-
supply DM Area
specifica- capacity
Total of of capacity 5 VDC 24 VDC
tions
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points CP1E-N14DR-A 14 8 6 AC power Relays 8K steps 8K words 0.17A 0.07A 360g max.
supply 100
CP1E-N14DT-A Sinking tran- 0.22A 0.02A 340g max.
to 240 VAC
sistor
CP1E-N14DT1-A Sourcing 0.22A 0.02A 340g max.
E
transistor
CP1E-N14DR-D DC power Relays 0.17A 0.07A 350g max.
CP1E-N14DT-D supply Sinking tran- 0.22A 0.02A 320g max.
24VDC sistor
CP1E-N14DT1-D Sourcing 0.22A 0.02A 320g max.
transistor
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CP1E-N20DR-A 20 12 8 AC power Relays 0.18A 0.08A 370g max.
supply 100 Sinking tran-
CP1E-N20DT-A 0.23A 0.02A 340g max.
to 240 VAC sistors

transistors
24VDC sistors
transistors
CP1E-N30DT-A supply 100 Sinking tran- 0.27A 0.02A 570g max.
to 240 VAC sistors

transistors
24VDC sistors
transistors
CP1E-N40DT-A 0.31A 0.02A 630g max.
to 240 VAC sistors

transistors
24VDC sistors
transistors
CP1E-N60DT-A 0.31A 0.02A 790g max.
to 240 VAC
sistor
E

transistor
supply
CP1E-N60DT-D Sinking tran- 0.31A 0.02A 670g max.
24VDC
sistor
transistor

NA-type CPU Units

Number of built-in I/O Built-in Current
points analog Power consumption
Name and appearance Model number supply Output Program DM Area
Weight
Number Number specifica- type capacity capacity 5 24
Total of of AD DA tions VDC VDC
2-2 CPU Units

inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 20 I/O CP1E-NA20DR-A 20 12 8 2 1 AC power Relays 8K steps 8K words 0.18A 0.11A 680g
Points and Built-in Analog supply 100 max.
to 240 VAC
CP1E-NA20DT-D DC power Sinking 0.23A 0.09A 500g
E
supply transistor max.
CP1E-NA20DT1-D 24VDC Sourcing 0.23A 0.09A 500g
transistor max.
2-2-2 Optional Products

2-2-2 Optional Products
Optional Products for CPU Units

Current
Name and appearance Model number Applications consumption Weight
5 VDC 24 VDC
RS-232C Option Board CP1W-CIF01 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or Includ- − Includ-
NA20 CPU Unit and can be used as an RS- ing in ing in
COMM
232C port. CPU CPU
Non-isolated RS-422A/485 CP1W-CIF11 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or Includ- − Includ-
Option Board NA20 CPU Unit and can be used as an RS- ing in ing in
422A/485 port. CPU CPU
COMM
Maximum transmission distance: 50 m
Isolated RS-422A/485 Option CP1W-CIF12 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or 0.075A − 30g
Board NA20 CPU Unit and can be used as an RS-
COMM
422A/485 port.
Maximum transmission distance: 500 m
Ethernet Option Board CP1W-CIF41 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or 0.130A − 23g
(version 2.0 or NA20 CPU Unit and can be used as an Ether-
higher) net port.
IP ADDRESS:
SUBNET MASK:
Maximum transmission distance: 100 m (dis-

tance between the hub and the node)
COMM ERR
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
Analog Input Option Board CP1W-ADB21 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or 0.020A − 25g
NA20 CPU Unit (version 1.2 or higher) and
can be used as an analog input module.
• 2 analog inputs
0 to 10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/2000)
Analog Output Option Board CP1W-DAB21V Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or 0.060A − 25g
NA20 CPU Unit (version 1.2 or higher) and
can be used as an analog output module.
• 2 analog outputs

Current
Name and appearance Model number Applications consumption Weight
5 VDC 24 VDC
Analog Input/Output Option CP1W-MAB221 Mounted in the option slot of an N30/40/60 or 0.080A − 25g
Board NA20 CPU Unit (version 1.2 or higher) and
can be used as an analog input/output mod-
ule.
• 2 analog inputs
0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/2000)
• 2 analog outputs
Battery CP1W-BAT01 Mounted in an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit. − − −
Mount the Battery to an N/NA(S)-type
CPU Unit if data in the following areas need to
be retained after a power interruption.
• DM Area (D) (excluding words backed up to
the EEPROM using the DM backup func-
tion)
• Counter Present Values and Completion
Flags (C)
• Auxiliary Area related to clock function (A)
A Battery cannot be mounted to an E(S)-
type CPU Unit.
Note 1 The CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette, CP1W-DAM01 LCD Option Board, and CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board
version 1.0 cannot be used with the CP1E CPU Unit.
2 Serial Option Boards cannot be used with the NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
Installation and Wiring Products

Name and appearance Model number Specifications and application
DIN Track PFP-50N Track length: 50 cm, Height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N Track length: 1 m, Height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N2 Track length: 1 m, Height: 16 mm
End Plate PFP-M Stopper to prevent Units from moving on the DIN Track.
I/O Connecting Cable CP1W-CN811 Length: 800 mm

This cable is used if the connecting cable for the Expansion I/O
Unit or Expansion Unit is not long enough or for a vertical configu-
ration.
Only one I/O Connecting Cable can be used in each PLC.

2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units
Unit Versions
2-2 CPU Units

A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CP Series according to differences in
functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
 Notation of Unit Versions on Products

The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the products for which
unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
2
CP1E CPU Unit
Product nameplate
2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units

CP1E-N40DR-A
CPU UNIT
Lot No. 28705 0000 Ver.1.0
OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA
Lot No.
Unit version
(example for unit version 1.0)
 Confirming Unit Versions with Support Software

CX-Programmer can be used to confirm the unit version of the CP1E CPU Units.
Refer to 4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP1E for details on the CX-Programmer.
The CX-Programmer can be used to confirm the unit version using one of the following methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information
Unit Versions
Type Model numbers Unit version
CP1E CPU Units CP1E-ESD- Unit version 1.
CP1E-NS(1)D-

Unit Versions and Support Software

The relationship between the unit versions of CP1E CPU Units and versions of Support Software is
shown below.
 Relationship between Unit Versions and Support Software
Required Support Software (see note.)

CX-Pro-
CX-Programmer CX-Programmer Micro PLC
grammer
Functions (CX-One) Limited Edition
CPU Unit for CP1E
used
Version Version Version Version Version Version Version
Version
8.2 9.03 9.42 9.6 8.2 9.03 9.42
1.0
or higher or higher or higher or higher or higher or higher or higher
CP1E-20D- Version 1.2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
CP1E-30D- or earlier
functions
CP1E-40D-
Support No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Smart Input
function
Version 1.3 No No No Yes No No No No
functions
CP1E-E10D- Version 1.2 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
CP1E-14D- or earlier
functions
CP1E-N60D-
Support No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
CP1E-NA20D-
Smart Input
function
functions
CP1E-E60SD- Version 1.2 No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
or earlier
functions
Support No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
Smart Input
function
functions
Note A Programming Console cannot be used.

2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit

This section describes the connection of Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units to a CP1E CPU Unit.
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units

• Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units cannot be connected to E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units.
• A total of up to three Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to an E30/40/60(S),
N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit.
 CP1E E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Unit 2
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units

CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units cannot be connected.
 CP1E E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit
A total of up to three CP-series Expansion I/O Units

and Expansion Units can be connected.
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11

NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CH CH CH CH CH CH
CH CH CH
IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
CH CH CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
CH CH CH
OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR
CH CH EXP CH CH EXP CH CH EXP

NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
2-3-2 Connection Methods

Connection cables for the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are used to connect the Units.
The length can be extended by using a CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
Leave approximately 10mm of space between the CPU Unit and the Exapansion I/O Units or Expan-
sion Units.
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or

Expansion Unit
Number of inputs: 24
Total number Number of outputs: 16
Built-in of Expansion
Built-in I/O on CPU Unit Total number of I/O points when
Analog I/O Units and
CPU Unit three CP1W-40ED Expansion
Expansion I/O Units are connected
Units that can
Number Number be connected Number Number
Total of outputs AD DA Total of
of inputs inputs of outputs
CP1E-E10D- 10 6 4 None None Not possible. 10 6 4
CP1E-14D- 14 8 6 14 8 6
CP1E-20D- 20 12 8 20 12 8
CP1E-30D- 30 18 12 3 Units maxi- 150 90 60
mum
CP1E-40D- 40 24 16 160 96 64
CP1E-60D- 60 36 24 180 108 72
CP1E-NA20D- 20 12 8 2 1 140 84 56

2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units
Expansion I/O Units

Current
Specifications
Name and appearance Model number consumption Weight
Outputs Inputs 5V 24V
8-point Input Unit CP1W-8ED Not provided. 8 inputs, 24 VDC 0.018A − 200g
8-point Output Unit CP1W-8ER 8 relay outputs Not provided. 0.026A 0.044A 250g
CP1W-8ET 8 transistor outputs, 0.075A − 250g

sinking
CP1W-8ET1 8 transistor outputs, 0.075A − 250g

sourcing
NC
OUT
NC
00
CH
COM
01
COM
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
02
COM
03
04
05
06
07
COM

OUT
16ER
sinking
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC

sourcing
20-point I/O Unit CP1W-20EDR1 8 relay outputs 12 inputs, 24 VDC 0.103A 0.044A 300g
CP1W-20EDT 8 transistor outputs, 0.130A − 300g

sinking
CP1W-20EDT1 8 transistor outputs, 0.130A − 300g

sourcing

sinking

sourcing
40-point I/O Unit CP1W-40EDR 16 relay outputs 24 inputs, 24 VDC 0.080A 0.090A 380g
CP1W-40EDT 16 transistor outputs, 0.160A − 320g

sinking
CP1W-40EDT1 16 transistor outputs, 0.160A − 320g

sourcing


Expansion Units
Current
Name and appearance Model number Specifications consumption Weight
5V 24V
Analog I/O Unit CP1W-MAD11 2 analog inputs 0.083A 0.110A 250g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA
1 analog output
NC NC
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
2
CP1W-MAD42 4 analog inputs 0.120A 0.120A 260g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

2 analog outputs
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/12,000
CP1W-MAD44 4 analog inputs 0.120A 0.170A 260g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
4 analog outputs
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Analog Input Unit CP1W-AD041 4 analog inputs 0.100A 0.090A 200g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
Resolution: 1/6,000
IN CH
I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
VIN1 COM1 I IN2 VIN3 COM3 I IN4 NC
CP1W-AD042 4 analog inputs 0.100A 0.050A 200g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
Analog Output Unit CP1W-DA021 2 analog outputs 0.040A 0.095A 200g
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
and 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
CP1W-DA041 4 analog outputs 0.080A 0.124A 200g
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC
and 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
CP1W-DA042 4 analog outputs 0.070A 0.160A 200g
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
and 4 to 20 mA
Temperature Sensor Unit CP1W-TS001 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 2 inputs 0.040A 0.059A 250g
CP1W-TS002 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 4 inputs 0.040A 0.059A 250g
CP1W-TS003 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 4 inputs 0.070A 0.030A 225g
or 2 analog inputs
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
CP1W-TS101 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 0.054A 0.073A 250g
Pt100 or JPt100, 2 inputs
CP1W-TS102 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 0.054A 0.073A 250g
Pt100 or JPt100, 4 inputs

Current
Name and appearance Model number Specifications consumption Weight
5V 24V
Temperature Sensor Unit CP1W-TS004 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 12 inputs 0.080A 0.050A 380g
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit CP1W-SRT21 Can perform communications as a Compo- 0.029A − 200g
Bus/S slave via 8 inputs and 8 outputs.
S No.
COMM
ERR
SRT21
EXP
BD H NC(BS+)
BD L NC(BS-) NC
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration

The following restrictions apply to the CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units
that can be connected to CP1E CPU Units.
Restriction on the Number of Connected Units

A total of up to three Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units can be connected to an E30/40/60(S),
N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit. Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units cannot be connected to
E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units.
Each CPU Unit can connect one device to pin 6 (+5V power supply) of the CP1W-CIF01 built-in
RS232C port. If one CPU Unit connects two devices, a total of up to two Expansion Units can be con-
nected to the CPU Unit.
Restrictions on External Power Supply Capacity

The following restrictions apply when using the CPU Unit’s external power supply.
 AC-power-supply E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit

The power supply capacity is restricted for AC-power-supply E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20
CPU Units. It may not be possible to use the full 300 mA of the external power supply, though a
CPU Unit can connect any CP-series Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
The entire 300 mA from the external power supply can be used if Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units are not connected.
Refer to 2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units are
Connected for details.
 AC-power-supply or DC-power-supply E10/14/20(S), N14/20 CPU Unit

There is no external power supply on AC-power-supply or DC-power-supply E10/14/20(S), N14/20
CPU Units.


Restrictions by ambient temperature
According to the ambient temperature, there are restrictions on power supply voltage and output
load current for the DC-power-supply CPU Units.
Refer to Output Specifications for Relay Outputs in 3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications and in 3-2-4 I/O
Specifications for details.
Restrictions on the Number of Simultaneously ON Points

Use CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1 32-point Output Units with the number of simultaneously ON less than 24 2
points (75%).
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration

Mounting Restriction
When connecting CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit with AC power,
provide a space of approximately 10 mm between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
10 mm
If sufficient space cannot be provided between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit, use the PLC in an ambient temperature of 0 to 50°C.

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and

External Power Supply Capacity
This section describes the current consumption and external power supply capacity of units used by the
CP1E.
2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or

Expansion Units are Connected
Power of 24 VDC can be supplied to external devices from E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20
CPU Units.
Calculate the usable capacity of external power supply according to the following example.
Calculation Examples of the Capacity Limit of External Power

Supply
CPU Unit Expansion Units Other Total Limit
devices
using PLC
1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit internal
power supply
CP1E- CP1W- CP1W- CP1W- NV3W-
40D-A DA041 DA041 DA041 MR20L
5V 0.21A 0.08A 0.08A 0.08A 0.2A 0.65A ≤1.2A
24V 0.09A 0.124A 0.124A 0.124A − 0.462A ≤0.7A
Power 5 V×0.65 A=3.25 W 14.258 W ≤18.5 W
consumption 24 V×0.462 A=11.088 W
Usable capacity 18.5 W (Total of usable power consumption) − 14.388 W= 4.162 W 0.173A ≤0.3A
of external 4.162 W/24 V=0.173 A
power supply

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External

2-4-2 Current Consumption
Power Supply Capacity

 CPU Units
E(S)-type CPU Units
Current consumption
I/O capacity Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
10 I/O points CP1E-E10DR-A 0.08A 0.04A
CP1E-E10DT-A 0.11A 0.00A
CP1E-E10DT1-A 0.11A 0.00A
CP1E-E10DR-D 0.08A 0.04A 2
CP1E-E10DT-D 0.11A 0.00A
CP1E-E10DT1-D 0.11A 0.00A

14 I/O points CP1E-E14SDR-A/E14DR-A 0.16A 0.07A
60 I/O points CP1E-E60SDR-A 0.17A 0.13A
N(S)-type CPU Units

Current consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
14 I/O points CP1E-N14DR-A 0.17A 0.07A
CP1E-N14DT-A 0.22A 0.02A
CP1E-N14DT1-A 0.22A 0.02A
CP1E-N14DR-D 0.17A 0.07A
CP1E-N14DT-D 0.22A 0.02A
CP1E-N14DT1-D 0.22A 0.02A
20 I/O points CP1E-N20DR-A 0.18A 0.08A
CP1E-N20DT-A 0.23A 0.02A
CP1E-N20DT1-A 0.23A 0.02A
CP1E-N20DR-D 0.18A 0.08A
CP1E-N20DT-D 0.23A 0.02A
CP1E-N20DT1-D 0.23A 0.02A
30 I/O points CP1E-N30S1DR-A/N30SDR-A/N30DR-A 0.21A 0.07A
CP1E-N30DT-A 0.27A 0.02A
CP1E-N30DT1-A 0.27A 0.02A
CP1E-N30DR-D 0.21A 0.07A
CP1E-N30S1DT-D/N30SDT-D/N30DT-D 0.27A 0.02A
CP1E-N30S1DT1-D/N30SDT1-D/N30DT1-D 0.27A 0.02A
CP1E-N40DT-A 0.31A 0.02A
CP1E-N40DT1-A 0.31A 0.02A
CP1E-N40DR-D 0.21A 0.09A
CP1E-N60DT-A 0.31A 0.02A
CP1E-N60DT1-A 0.31A 0.02A
CP1E-N60DR-D 0.21A 0.13A

NA-type CPU Units

Current consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
20 I/O points CP1E-NA20DR-A 0.18A 0.11A
and built-in CP1E-NA20DT-D 0.23A 0.09A
analog CP1E-NA20DT1-D 0.23A 0.09A
Note 1 The current consumption of CP1W-CIF01/11 Option Boards is included in the CPU Unit’s current con-
sumption.
2 The current consumption of CP1W-CIF12 Option Boards is 0.075A (5 VDC).
3 The current consumption of CP1W-CIF41 Option Boards version 2.0 is 0.13A (5 VDC).
4 The current consumption of CP1W-ADB21 Option Board is 0.020A (5VDC).
5 The current consumption of CP1W-DAB21V Option Board is 0.060A (5VDC).
6 The current consumption of CP1W-MAB221 Option Board is 0.08A (5VDC).
7 The current consumptions given in the following table must be added to the current consumption of the
CPU Unit if an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit is connected.
 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

Current consumption
Unit name Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
Expansion I/O Units 8 inputs CP1W-8ED 0.018A −
8 outputs CP1W-8ER 0.026A 0.044A
CP1W-8ET 0.075A −
CP1W-8ET1
CP1W-16ET 0.076A −
CP1W-16ET1
20 I/O points CP1W-20EDR1 0.103A 0.044A
12 inputs CP1W-20EDT 0.130A −
8 outputs CP1W-20EDT1
CP1W-32ET 0.113A −
CP1W-32ET1
40 I/O points CP1W-40EDR 0.080A 0.090A
24 inputs CP1W-40EDT 0.160A −
16 outputs CP1W-40EDT1
Expa- Analog Input 4 inputs CP1W-AD041 0.100A 0.090A
nsion Unit CP1W-AD042 0.100A 0.050A
Units
2 outputs CP1W-DA021 0.040A 0.095A
Analog Output 4 outputs CP1W-DA041 0.080A 0.124A
Unit
CP1W-DA042 0.070A 0.160A
Analog I/O Unit Analog inputs: 2 CP1W-MAD11 0.083A 0.110A
Analog outputs: 1
Analog inputs: 4 CP1W-MAD42 0.120A 0.120A
Analog outputs: 2
Analog inputs: 4 CP1W-MAD44 0.120A 0.170A
Analog outputs: 4
Temperature K or J thermocou- CP1W-TS001 0.040A 0.059A
Sensor Units ples CP1W-TS002
CP1W-TS004 0.080A 0.050A
K, J thermocou- CP1W-TS003 0.070A 0.030A
ples or analog
inputs
Pt or JPt platinum CP1W-TS101 0.054A 0.073A
resistance ther- CP1W-TS102
mometers
CompoBus/S 8 inputs CP1W-SRT21 0.029A −
I/O Link Unit 8outputs

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External

 Other Devices Using PLC Internal Power Supply
Current consumption
Unit name Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
Power Supply Capacity

Conversion Adapter CJ1W-CIF11 0.04A −
NT-AL001 0.15A −
Programmable Backlight NV3W-MG20L 0.2A −
Terminal Green/Orange/Red
Backlight NV3W-MR20L 0.2A −
White/Pink/Red
Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.


Part Names and Functions
3
This section describes the part names, function specifications and terminal arrange-
ments of the CP1E CPU Unit and other Units.
3-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-1-1 E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-2 E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-1-4 Optional Serial Communications Port for N/NA(S)-type CPU Units . . . 3-19
3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N/NA-type CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-2 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-2-2 Expansion Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-2-4 I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

3-1 CPU Units

This section describes the names of the CPU Unit parts and provides the I/O specifications and termi-
nal arrangements. Refer to A-1 Dimensions for the dimensions, A-2 Wiring Diagrams for the wiring dia-
grams.
3-1-1 E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units

E-type CPU Unit
N-type CPU Unit
CP1E-E10D-
CP1E-N14/20D-
CP1E-E14/20DR-A
(7) Power supply input terminals
(8) Ground terminal

(1) Input terminal block
(9) Input terminals
(2) Input indicators
(13) Built-in RS-232C
communications
(3) Peripheral status indicator
USB port
(14) Built-in RS-232C
(4) Analog port
adjusters
(5) Operation indicators (10) Output indicators
(12) Battery
(6) Output terminals (11) Output terminal cover
block
CP1E-E14/20SDR-A
(7) Power supply input terminals
(1) Input terminal block (8) Ground terminal

(9) Input terminals
(5) Operation indicators
(10) Output indicators
(3) Peripheral
USB port (11) Output terminal
(6) Output terminals block

Number Name Function

(1) Input terminal block This is the terminal block for inputs such as the power supply input and
24 VDC inputs.
(2) Input indicators (yellow) Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(3) Peripheral USB port Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitoring
by the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
(4) Analog adjusters for By turning an analog adjuster, it is possible to adjust the value of A642 or
E/N-type CPU Units A643 within a range of 0 to 255.
(5) Operation indicators The CPU Unit’s operating status can be confirmed with this indicator.
3-1 CPU Units

Refer to CPU Unit Status Indicators (Page 3-4).
(6) Output terminals Loads such as lamps, contactors, and solenoid valves can be connected.
(7) Power supply input ter- Power of 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC can be supplied.
minals
(8) Ground terminal
Protective ground ( ): To prevent electric shock, ground to 100 Ω or less.
(9) Input terminals Input devices such as switches and sensors can be connected. 3
(10) Output indicators (yel- Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is ON.
low)
3-1-1 E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units

(11) Output terminal block This is the terminal block for outputs such as relay outputs and transistor
outputs.
(12) Battery cover for N- A Battery can be installed by opening the cover. (The Battery is optional).
type CPU Units
(13) Built-in RS-232C com- This indicator will be flashing when the built-in RS-232C port is in commu-
munications status indi- nication mode.
cator
(14) Built-in RS-232C port for By connecting a PT, the controlled system can be monitored and data
N-type CPU Units can be collected.

CPU Unit Status Indicators

: Not lit : Flashing : Lit
Indicator Color Status Description
POWER Green Power is ON.
Lit
POWER
Power is OFF.
Not lit
RUN
RUN Green The CP1E is executing a program in either RUN or MONITOR
ERR/ALM Lit mode.
Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error.
INH Not lit
ERR/ALM Red A fatal error (including FALS execution) or a hardware error (WDT
PRPHL Lit error) has occurred.
CP1E operation will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF.
BKUP
A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL execution).
Flashing CP1E operation will continue.
Normal
Not lit
INH Yellow The Output OFF Bit (A500.15) was turned ON.
Lit All outputs will be turned OFF.
Normal
Not lit
PRPHL Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress
Flashing through the peripheral USB port.
Other than the above.
Not lit
BKUP Yellow The user programs, parameters, or specified DM Area words are
Lit being written to the backup memory (built-in EEPROM).
Not lit

Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when the BKUP indicator is lit. It indicates that
data is being written to the backup memory (built-in EEPROM).
If the power supply is turned OFF while the BKUP indicator is ON, data in the backup memory
(built-in EEPROM) may be destroyed.

Terminal Arrangements
 Input Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP1E-E10D-A
CIO 0
3-1 CPU Units

L1,L2/N : Power supply terminal
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05
: Protective ground terminal
NC 00 02 04 COM : Common terminal
00 to 05 : Input terminal
NC : No connection
CP1E-14D-A
3
CIO 0
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
3-1-1 E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units

NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
CP1E-20D-A
CIO 0
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
DC Power Supply
CP1E-E10D-D
CIO 0
+,- : Power supply terminal
+ - COM 01 03 05
NC 00 02 04 COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
CP1E-N14D-D
CIO 0
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
CP1E-N20D-D
CIO 0
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection

 Output Arrangement
AC Power Supply and DC Power Supply

CP1E-E10D-
00 01 02 03 COM : Common terminal

00 to 03 : Output terminal
COM COM NC COM NC NC : No connection
CIO 100
CP1E-14D-
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC COM : Common terminal

COM COM NC COM NC COM NC NC : No connection
CIO 100
CP1E-20D-
00 01 02 03 04 05 07 COM : Common terminal

COM COM NC COM NC COM 06 NC : No connection
CIO 100

3-1-2 E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units

N/NA-type CPU Unit
E-type CPU Unit
CP1E-N30/40/60D-
CP1E-E30/40DR-A
CP1E-NA20D-
3-1 CPU Units

(6) Operation (14) Battery (15) Built-in RS-232C communications
indicators (7) Input terminals
cover status indicator
(1) Input terminal
block (20) Analog input
(8) Ground terminals
(2) Input terminal
indicators
(3) Peripheral (9) Expansion
USB port
(4) Analog
I/O Unit
connector 3
adjusters (10) Output
indicators (21) Analog output
(5) Operation

(11) Output terminals
indicators
terminal
(13) External power (12) Output terminals block
(17) Built-in RS-232C (16) Serial Option
supply port Board slot
CP1E-E30/40/60SDR-A CP1N-N30/40/60S(1)D-
(6) Power supply (14) Battery

input terminals (7) Input terminals cover
(1) Input terminal
block
(8) Ground
(2) Input terminal
indicators (9) Expansion (15) Built-in RS-232C
(3) Peripheral
I/O Unit communications
USB port
connector status indicator
(5) Operation (10) Output
indicators (17) Built-in RS-232C
indicators
port
(11) Output
terminal (18) Built-in RS-485
block communications
(13) External power (12) Output terminals status indicator (19) Built-in RS-485 port
supply


(1) Input terminal block This is the terminal block for inputs such as the power supply input and
24-VDC inputs.
(2) Input indicators (yellow) Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(3) Peripheral USB port Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitor-
ing by the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
(4) Analog adjusters for By turning an analog adjuster, it is possible to adjust the value of A642
N/NA-type CPU Units or A643 within a range of 0 to 255.
(5) Operation indicators The CPU Unit’s operating status can be confirmed with this indicator.
Refer to CPU Unit Status Indicators (Page 3-9).
(6) Power supply input terminal Power of 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC can be supplied.
(7) Input terminals Input devices such as switches and sensors can be connected.
(8) Ground terminal
Protective ground ( ): To prevent electric shock, ground to 100 Ω or
less.
Functional ground ( ): If noise is a significant source of errors or if
electrical shock is a problem, connect to the protective ground terminal
and ground both with a ground of 100Ω or less (AC power supply only).
(9) Expansion I/O Unit connec- CP-series Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units such as Analog I/O
tor Units, and Temperature Sensors can be connected.
Refer to 5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.
(10) Output indicators (yellow) Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is
ON.
(11) Output terminal block This is the terminal block for outputs such as relay outputs, transistor
outputs, and the external power supply output.
(12) Output terminals Loads such as lamps, contactors, and solenoid valves can be con-
nected.
(13) External power supply ter- The external supply terminals output up to 300 mA max at 24 VDC.
minals They can be used as a service power supply for input devices (AC
power supply only).
(14) Battery cover for A Battery can be installed by opening the cover. (Battery is optional).
N/NA(S)-type CPU
Units
(15) Built-in RS-232C communi- This indicator will be flashing when the built-in RS-232C port is in com-
cations status indicator munication mode.
(16) Option Board slot for An Option Board can be connected to the slot.
N/NA-type CPU Units • CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board
• CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Maximum transmission
distance: 50 m) or CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A/485 Option Board
(Maximum transmission distance: 500 m)
• CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board version 2.0 (Maximum
transmission distance: 100 m)
• CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V Analog Option Board (Can be
mounted only to N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units version 1.2 or higher.)
(17) Built-in RS-232C port for By connecting a PT, the controlled system can be monitored and data
N/NA(S)-type CPU can be collected.
Units
(18) Built-in RS-485 communi- This indicator will be flashing when the built-in RS-485 port is in commu-
cations status indicator nication mode.
(19) Built-in RS-485 port for Communications are possible between an inverter and a PLC by using
NS1-type CPU Units Modbus-RTU and Serial PLC Links.
(20) Analog input terminals for Analog output devices such as switches and sensors can be con-
NA-type CPU Units nected.
(21) Analog output terminals for Analog input device can be connected.
NA-type CPU Units

CPU Unit Status Indicators

Indicator Color Status Description
POWER Green
Power is ON.
Lit
POWER
Power is OFF.
Not lit
3-1 CPU Units

RUN
RUN Green
The CP1E is executing a program in either RUN or MONITOR mode.
Lit
ERR/ALM
Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error.
Not lit
INH
ERR/ALM Red A fatal error (including FALS execution) or a hardware error (WDT
PRPHL Lit error) has occurred. 3
CP1E operation will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF.
BKUP A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL execution).
Flashing CP1E operation will continue.

Normal
Not lit
INH Yellow The Output OFF Bit (A500.15) was turned ON.
Lit All outputs will be turned OFF.
Normal
Not lit
PRPHL Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
Flashing the peripheral USB port.

Not lit
BKUP Yellow The user program, parameters, or specified DM Area words are being
Lit written to the backup memory (built-in EEPROM).

Not lit
RS232C Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
Flashing the RS232C.

Not lit
RS485 Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
Flashing the RS485.

Not lit

Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when the BKUP indicator is lit. It indicates that
data is being written to the backup memory (built-in EEPROM).
If the power supply is turned OFF while the BKUP indicator is ON, data in the backup memory
(built-in EEPROM) may be destroyed.

 Input Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP1E-30D-A
CIO 0 CIO 1
L1, L2/N : Power supply terminal
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 COM : Common terminal
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC 00 to 11 : Input terminal
: Functional ground terminal
CP1E-40D-A : Protective ground terminal
NC : No connection
CIO 0 CIO 1
V IN0, V IN1 : Analog voltage Input
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
I IN0, I IN1 : Analog current Input
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
COM0, COM1: Common terminal for analog
AG : Analog 0V
CP1E-60D-A
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CP1E-NA20DR-A
CIO 0 CIO 90 CIO 91

L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1
00 02 04 06 08 10 VIN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1
DC Power Supply
CP1E-30D-D
+, - : Power supply terminal
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 COM : Common terminal
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC 00 to 11 : Input terminal
CIO 0 CIO 1 NC : No connection
CP1E-40D-D
V IN0, V IN1 : Analog voltage Input
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
I IN0, I IN1 : Analog current Input
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
COM0, COM1: Common terminal for analog
CIO 0 CIO 1 AG : Analog 0V
CP1E-60D-D
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
CP1E-NA20D-D
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 VIN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1

CIO 0 CIO 90 CIO 91

 Output Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP1E-30D-A
+,- : External supply terminal
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
COM : Common terminal
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 00 to 07 : Output terminal
CIO 100 CIO 101
VOUT0 : Analog voltage Output
CP1E-40D-A I OUT0 : Analog current Output
COM0 : Common terminal for analog
3-1 CPU Units

+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
- COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-60D-A
+
3
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
− COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102

CP1E-NA20DR-A
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUT0
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUT0 COM0

CIO 100 CIO 190
DC Power Supply
CP1E-N30D-D
NC : No connection
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 COM : Common terminal
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 00 to 07 : Output terminal
CIO 100 CIO 101
VOUT0 : Analog voltage Output
CP1E-N40D-D I OUT0 : Analog current Output
COM0 : Common terminal for analog
NC 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-N60D-D
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CP1E-NA20D-D
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUT0
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUT0 COM0

CIO 100 CIO 190

CP1E-N30S(1)DT-D
COM ：Common terminal
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
00~07 ：Output terminal
V- COM(V-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
V+ ：External supply terminal (DC24V)
CIO 100 CIO 101
V- ：External supply terminal (0V)
Note COM(V-) has been connected with V- in an inner circuit.
CP1E-N30S(1)DT1-D
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(V+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03

CIO 100 CIO 101
Note COM(V+) has been connected with V+ in an inner circuit.
CP1E-N40S(1)DT-D
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(V-) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-N40S(1)DT1-D
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(V+) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-N60S(1)DT-D
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(V-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CP1E-N60S(1)DT1-D
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(V+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102

3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications

The following table gives the specifications that apply to the built-in I/O on a CP1E CPU Unit.
Specifications
Item Specification
High-speed counter inputs,
High-speed counter inputs interrupt inputs, quick-
3-1 CPU Units

Input type Normal inputs
or normal inputs response inputs
or normal inputs
CIO 0.08 to CIO 0.11,
Input bits CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.01 CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07*1 CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11 and
CIO 2.00 to CIO 2.11 *1
Input voltage 24 VDC, +10%, -15%
Applicable 2-wire and 3-wire sensors 3
sensors
Input 3.3 kΩ 3.3 kΩ 4.8 kΩ

impedance
Input current 7.5 mA typical 7.5 mA typical 5 mA typical
ON voltage/ 3 mA min. at 17.0 VDC min. 3 mA min. at 17.0 VDC min. 3 mA min. at 14.4 min.
current
OFF voltage/ 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max. 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max. 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max.
current
ON response E(S)-type CPU Unit: 50 μs 50 μs max. 1 ms max.
time*2 min.
N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit:
2.5 μs min.
OFF response E(S)-type CPU Unit: 50 μs 50 μs max. 1 ms max.
time*2 min.
N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit:
2.5 μs min.
Circuit E(S)-type CPU Unit N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit
configuration
Inputs: CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.07 Inputs: CIO 0.00, CIO 0.01
IN IN
Input indicator Input indicator
1000pF 1000pF
910Ω
4.3kΩ
3.3kΩ Internal 3.3kΩ Internal

IN IN
circuits circuits
COM COM
Inputs: CIO 0.08 to CIO 0.11

and CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11 Inputs: CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07
IN IN
Input indicator Input indicator
1000pF
Internal Internal
910Ω
750Ω
4.8kΩ 3.3kΩ
IN IN
circuits circuits
COM COM
Inputs: CIO 0.08 to CIO 0.11, CIO 1.00

to CIO 1.11 and CIO 2.00 to CIO 2.11
IN
Input indicator
Internal
750Ω
4.8kΩ
IN circuits
COM

*1 The bits that can be used depend on the model of CPU Unit.
*2 The response time is the delay caused by hardware. The delay set in the PLC Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8
ms) for a normal input must be added to this value.
Pulse plus direction input mode,

Increment mode
Up/down input mode Differential phase mode
N/NA(S)-type: 0.00/0.01 N/NA(S)-type: 0.00/0.01

10.0μs min. 20.0μs min.
ON 90%
ON 90% 50%
50% OFF 10%
OFF 10%
2.5μs 2.5μs ON 90%
min. min. 50%
OFF 10%
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1, T2, T3, T4: 2.5 μs min.
E(S)-type: 0.00 to 0.07 E(S)-type: 0.00 to 0.03

N/NA(S)-type: 0.02 to 0.07 N/NA(S)-type: 0.02/0.03
100μs min. 200μs min.
ON 90%
ON 90% 50%
50% OFF 10%
OFF 10%
50μs 50μs ON 90%
min. min. 50%
OFF 10%
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1, T2, T3, T4: 50 μs min.
Output Specifications for Relay Outputs

CP1E-DR-
Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ= 1)
2 A 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Service life of Electrical Resistive 200,000 operations (24 VDC)
relay load
Inductive 70,000 operations (250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4)
load
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON response time 15 ms max.
OFF response time 15 ms max.
Circuit configuration
Output indicator OUT
Internal OUT
circuits
COM 250 VAC, 2A,
24 VDC, 2 A
max.

 Estimating the Service Life of Relays

Under normal conditions, the service life of output contacts is as shown above. The service life of
relays is as shown in the following diagram as a guideline.
CP1E-DR-
1000
700 125-VAC resistive load
500
300
200 30-VDC/250-VAC
resistive load
3-1 CPU Units

100
70
50
Life (x 10 )
4
30
20
125 VAC cosφ= 0.4
10
7
5 250 VAC cosφ= 0.4/
3 30 VDC, τ = 7ms 3
2
1
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10

Contact current (A)
 Relationship between Continuous Simultaneous ON Rate and Ambient

Temperature
There are restrictions on the power supply voltage and output load current imposed by the ambient
temperature. Make sure that the power supply voltage and output load current are within the follow-
ing ranges.
CP1E-N14DR-D
CP1E-N30DR-D CP1E-N40DR-D CP1E-N60DR-D
CP1E-N20DR-D
100% 100% 100% 100%

Power voltage Power voltage Power voltage:
21.6VDC Power voltage
21.6VDC 21.6VDC
21.6VDC
50% 50% 50% 50%
Power voltage Power voltage:
Power voltage Power voltage
20.4VDC 20.4VDC
20.4VDC 20.4VDC
0% 0% 0% 0%
40 45 55˚C 35 45 55˚C 30 45 50 55˚C 40 45 55˚C
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
CP1E-14(S)DR-A
CP1E-20(S)DR-A CP1E-NA20DR-A
CP1E-N20DT-
100% 100%
80%
50%
0%
50 55˚C 0%
50 55˚C
Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature
Note The above restrictions apply to the relay output load current from the CPU Unit even if Expansion I/O Units
are not connected.

Output Specifications for Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)

CP1E- N14/20/30/40/60DT(1)-, CP1E-E10DT(1)-, CP1E-NA20DT(1)-
 Normal Outputs
Specification
Item *2
N/NA(S)-type: CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 N/NA(S)-type: CIO 100.02 to CIO 102.07
E10-type: CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03
Maximum 0.3 A/output, 0.9 A/common*1
switching 4.5 to 30 VDC
capacity CP1E-E10D-: 0.9 A/Unit CP1E-N40(S)D-: 3.6 A/Unit
CP1E-N14D-: 1.5 A/Unit CP1E-N60(S)D-: 5.4 A/Unit
CP1E-N20D-: 1.8 A/Unit CP1E-NA20D-: 1.8 A/Unit
CP1E-N30(S)D-: 2.7 A/Unit
Minimum 1 mA 4.5 to 30 VDC
switching
capacity
Leakage current 0.1mA max.
Residual volt- 0.6 V max. 1.5V max.
age
ON response 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max.
time
OFF response 0.1 ms max. 1 ms max.
time
Fuse Not provided.
External 20.4 to 26.4VDC 30mA max. Not needed
power supply (N/NA-type is not needed)
Circuit • NS(1)-type CPU Unit Sinking output model
configuration Sinking output model
V+
OUT
20.4 to 26.4 L
~
V- VDC OUT
L
Internal 24 VDC,
OUT circuits 4.5 to 30
L
VDC
~
OUT
L
COM(–)
Internal Internal 4.5 to 30
circuits circuits VDC
Sourcing output model
COM(V-)

COM(+)
V+
20.4 to 26.4 Internal 24 VDC,
VDC circuits 4.5 to 30
V-
OUT VDC
L
COM(V+)
~
OUT
L
Internal Internal 4.5 to 30
circuits circuits VDC
OUT
L
~
OUT
L
• N/NA-type CPU Unit

Sinking output model
OUT
L
~
OUT
L
Internal Internal 24 VDC,
circuits circuits 4.5 to 30
VDC
COM(–)
COM(+)
Internal Internal 24 VDC,

circuits circuits 4.5 to 30
OUT VDC
L
~
OUT
L
*1 Also do not exceed 0.9 A for the total of CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03, which are different common.

*2 The bits that can be used depend on the model of CPU Unit.

Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity.
 Pulse Outputs (CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01)

Item Specification
3-1 CPU Units

Maximum switching capacity 100 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Minimum switching capacity 7 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Maximum output frequency 100 kHz
Output waveform
OFF 90%
3
ON 10%

4μs min. 2μs min.
The OFF and ON refer to the output transistor. The output transistor is ON at
level “L”.
• The load for the above values is assumed to be the resistive load, and does not take into
account the impedance for the connecting cable to the load.
• Due to distortions in pulse waveforms resulting from connecting cable impedance, the pulse
widths in actual operation may be smaller than the values shown above.
 PWM Output (CIO 100.01)

Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 30 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Maximum output frequency 32 kHz
PWM output accuracy For ON duty +1%, -0%:10 kHz output
For ON duty +5%, -0%: 0 to 32 kHz output
Output waveform OFF
ON
tON
tON
T ON duty= × 100%
T
The OFF and ON refer to the output transistor. The output transistor is ON at
level “L”.

Analog I/O (NA-type CPU Units)

The NA-type CPU Units of the CP1E CPU Units are equipped with 2 built-in analog inputs and 1
built-in analog output.
 Analog Input Specifications

Item Voltage input Current input
Number of inputs 2 inputs (Allocated 2 words: CIO 90 to CIO 91.)
Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or - 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
10 to 10 V
Max. rated input ±15 V ±30 mA
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250Ω
Resolution 1/6000
Overall accuracy At 25°C ±0.3% full scale ±0.4% full scale
0 to 55°C ±0.6% full scale ±0.8% full scale
A/D conversion -10 to 10 V F448 to 0BB8 hex FS
data Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS
Averaging function Supported (Set for individual inputs in the PLC Setup.)
Open-circuit detection function Supported (Value when disconnected: 8000 hex)
 Analog Output Specifications

Item Voltage output Current output
Number of outputs 1 output (Allocated 1 word: CIO 190.)
Output signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or - 0 to 20 mA* or 4 to 20 mA
10 to 10 V
Allowable external output load resis- 1 kΩ min. 600Ω max.
tance
External input impedance 0.5Ωmax. ---
Resolution 1/6000
Overall accuracy At 25°C ±0.4% full scale
0 to 55°C ±0.8% full scale
D/A conversion -10 to 10 V F448 to 0BB8 hex FS
data Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS
* When the analog current output is 0 to 20mA, the accuracy cannot be ensured at 0.2mA or less.
 Shared I/O Specifications

Item Specification
Conversion time 2 ms/point (6 ms total for 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output.)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No iso-
lation between analog I/O signals.

3-1-4 Optional Serial Communications Port for N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

The Serial Communication Port can be used for a CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit.
N/NA-type CPU Units
3-1 CPU Units

CP1E N30/40/60
or NA20 CPU Unit
3
Built-in

RS-232C port
+2#&&4'55
57$0'6/#5-
%1// '44 10BASE-T

100BASE-TX
CP1W-CIF01 CP1W-CIF11/12 CP1W-CIF41

RS-232C Option RS-422A/485 Option Ethernet Option
Board Board Board version 2.0
Optional Serial Communication Board

Maximum
Model numbers Port transmission Connection method
distance
One RS-232C port 15m Connector (D-sub, 9 pin
CP1W-CIF01
female)
CP1W-CIF11 One RS-422A/485 port (not isolated) 50m Terminal block (using ferrules)
CP1W-CIF12 One RS-422A/485 port (isolated) 500m Terminal block (using ferrules)
CP1W-CIF41 One Ethernet port 100m Connector (RJ45, 8 pin modular)
 How to mount an Option Board

When mounting an Option Board, first remove the slot cover.
Grasp both of the cover’s up/down lock levers at the same time to unlock the cover, and then pull
the cover out.
Then to mount the Option Board, check the alignment and firmly press it in until it snaps into place.

Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or removing an Option Board.

N/NAS(1) -type CPU Units
CP1E N30/40/60S(1)
CPU Unit
Built-in RS-232C port
Built-in RS-485 port

(NS1-type CPU Unit only)
Built-in RS-232C Port and CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector

COMM
RS-232C connector
 RS-232C Connector
Abbr.
5 1
N-type
Pin NS(1)- Signal Signal direction
built-in RS-
type built-in
232C port
RS-232C port
CP1W-CIF01
9 6
1 FG Frame ground −
2 SD(TXD) Send data Outputs
3 RD(RXD) Receive data Inputs
4 RS(RTS) Request to send Outputs
5 CS(CTS) Clear to send Inputs
6 5V Power −
7 DR(DSR) NC* Data set ready Inputs
8 ER(DTR) NC* Data terminal ready Outputs
9 SG(0V) Signal ground −
Connector hood FG Frame ground −
* DR and ER signals are not supported by the built-in RS-232C port on the NS-type CPU Unit.
Note 1 The following devices can be connected to pin 6 (+5V) on the built-in RS-232C port on the CPU Unit or the
RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01) mounted to the CPU Unit. Do not connect pin 6 to any other device.
• RS-422A CJ1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter
• RS-232C / RS-422A NT-AL001 Conversion Adapter
• NV3W-M20L Programmable Terminal
2 CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.

Built-in RS-485 Port (2-wire) for N30/40/60S1 CPU Units
 RS-485 Terminal Block
ON A- B+ FG
3-1 CPU Units

DIP switch
 DIP switch for terminating resistance settings

Setting
ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection 3
OFF OFF Resistance value: 220Ω typical

CP1W-CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A/485 Option Board
Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector
COMM
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG

DIP switch for operation
settings
RS-232C connector
 RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Tighten screws on the terminal

block to 0.28 N.m.
RDA- FG
RDB+ SDA- SDB+

 DIP switch for operation settings

O Pin Setting
N
1 ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection
OFF OFF Resistance value:220Ω typical
1
2
3
4
5
6 2 ON 2-wire connections 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1
OFF 4-wire connections
3 ON 2-wire connections 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1
OFF 4-wire connections
4 − − Not used.
5 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD*2
OFF RS control disabled (Data
always received.)
6 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for SD*3
OFF RS control disabled (Data
always sent.)
*1 Set both pins 2 and 3 to either ON (2-wire) or OFF (4-wire).
*2 To disable the echo-back function, set pin 5 to ON (RS control enabled).
*3 When connecting to a device on the N side in a 1: N connection with the 4-wire method,
set pin 6 to ON (RS control enabled).
Also, when connecting by the 2-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS control enabled).
CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board
Front Rear
CPU Unit connector
Label
Attach the label here to show IP
address and subnet mask.
Ethernet Connector
Used to connect the Ethernet
twisted-pair cable.
LED Indicators
Display the operating status of the Option Board.
 LED Indicators
Indicator Color Status Meaning
COMM Yellow Not lit Not sending or receiving data.
Flashing Sending or receiving data.
ERR Red Not lit Unit normal.
Lit An fatal error has occurred at the Unit.
Flashing An no-fatal error has occurred at the unit.
 Ethernet Connectors
The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted-pair
cable.
Electrical specifications: Conforming to IEEE802.3 standards

Connector structure: RJ45 8-pin Modular Connector (conforming to ISO8877)

Connector Pin Signal Name Abbr. Signal Direction
1 Transmission data + TD+ Output
2 Transmission data - TD- Output
3 Reception data + RD+ Input
4 Not used --- ---
5 Not used --- ---
6 Reception data - RD- Input
3-1 CPU Units

7 Not used --- ---
8 Not used --- ---
Hood Frame ground FG ---

3
Connecting the Cable
• Turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before connection or disconnecting twisted-pair cable.

• Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted-pair cable.

3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N/NA-type CPU Units

The Analog Option Board can be used for a CP1E N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit.
N/NA-type CPU Units
CP1E N30/40/60
or NA20 CPU Unit
Built-in
RS-232C port
CP1W-ADB21 CP1W-DAB21V CP1W-MAB221

Analog Input Analog Output Analog Input/Output
Option Board Option Board Option Board
Analog Option Board

CP1 series analog option board units are non-isolated analog units which allow you to easily realize
analog input/output function for CP1E N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit (unit version 1.2 or higher).
Voltage Input Current Input Voltage Output
0V~10V 0mA~20mA 0V~10V
Analog Option Board
(Resolution: (Resolution: (Resolution:
1/4000) 1/2000) 1/4000)
Analog I/O Option Board CP1W-MAB221 2CH 2CH
Analog Input Option Board CP1W-ADB21 2CH ---
Analog Output Option Board CP1W-DAB21V --- 2CH
 How to mount an Analog Option Board

Press the up/down lock-levers on both sides of the Option Board slot cover at the same time to
unlock the cover, and then pull the cover out.
Check the alignment to make the corner cut of the Analog Option Board fit in the Option Board slot,
and firmly press the Analog Option Board in until it snaps into place.

Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit and wait until all the operation indicators go
out before installing or removing the analog option board.
Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

Analog Input Option Board
 Analog Input Terminal Arrangement
VI1 Voltage Input 1

II1 Current Input 1
VI2 Voltage Input 2
3-1 CPU Units

II2 Current Input 2
COM Input Common
Note When using current inputs, voltage input terminals must be short-circuited with current input terminals.
 Main Specifications 3
Specifications
Item

Voltage Input Current Input
Input signal range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA
Max. rated input 0 V to 15 V 0 mA to 30 mA
External input impedance 200 kΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/4000 (full scale) 1/2000 (full scale)
Overall accuracy 25°C: ±0.5% (full scale) 25°C: ±0.6% (full scale)
0 to 55°C: ±1.0% (full scale) 0 to 55°C: ±1.2% (full scale)
A/D conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex 0000 to 07D0 hex
Averaging function Not supported
Conversion time Inner sample time 2ms/point
Refresh time refers to 18-9 Analog Option Board Refresh Time in the
CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480)
Isolation method None
Current consumption 5 VDC: 20 mA max.

Analog Output Option Board
 Analog Output Terminal Arrangement
VO1 Voltage Output 1

COM Output Common
 Main Specifications
Specifications
Item
Voltage Output Current Output
Output signal range 0 V to 10 V ---
External output allowable load resistance 2 kΩ min. ---
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. ---
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) ---
Overall accuracy 25°C: ±0.5% 0 to 55°C: ±1.0% ---
D/A conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex ---
Conversion time Inner conversion time 2ms/point
Refresh time refers to 18-9 Analog Option Board Refresh Time in
the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480)

Analog I/O Option Board
 Analog I/O Terminal Arrangement
VI1 Voltage Input 1

II1 Current Input 1
VI2 Voltage Input 2
3-1 CPU Units

II2 Current Input 2
COM Analog I/O Common
COM Analog I/O Common
3
 Main Specifications

Specifications
Item
Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Input Section Input signal range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA
Max. rated input 0 V to 15 V 0 mA to 30 mA
External input impedance 200 kΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) 1/2,000 (full scale)
Overall accuracy 25°C: ±0.5% (full scale) 25°C: ±0.6% (full scale)
0 to 55°C: ±1.0% (full scale) 0 to 55°C: ±1.2% (full scale)
A/D conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex 0000 to 07D0 hex
Averaging function Not supported
Analog Output Section Output signal range 0 V to 10 V ---
External output allowable 2 kΩ min. ---
load resistance
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. ---
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) ---
Overall accuracy 25°C: ±0.5% 0 to 55°C: ---
±1.0%
D/A conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex ---
Conversion time Inner conversion time 6ms (4CH total)
Refresh time refers to 18-9 Analog Option Board Refresh
Time in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W480)

3-2 Expansion I/O Units

This section describes the names of the Expansion I/O Unit parts and provides the input specifications
and terminal arrangement. Refer to A-1 Dimensions for the dimensions, A-2 Wiring Diagrams for the
wiring diagrams.
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit

8-point Input Units (CP1W-8ED)
(1) Input terminals

(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
(4) Expansion connector

(1) Input terminals

(1) Input terminals Used to connect input devices.
(2) Expansion I/O connecting This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion
cable I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrange-
ments, use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Input indicators Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(4) Expansion connector CP-series Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected.
The first word of input words allocated to the Expansion Input Unit is indicated by CIO m.
 Input Terminal Arrangement
Unit Upper Terminal Block Unit Lower Terminal Block
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
CIO m
Note COM terminals are connected inside.

3-2-2 Expansion Output Units

8-point Output Units 16-point Output Units

CP1W-8ER/8ET/8ET1 CP1W-16ER/ET/ET1

(2) Expansion I/O
(2) Expansion I/O NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM
connecting cable (3) Output indicators connecting cable

NC
OUT
00
CH
01 02 03 05 07
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(4) Expansion connector 16ER
OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
3
CH EXP
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
(3) Output indicators NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC

3-2-2 Expansion Output Units

32-point Output Units
CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1

(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable

(1) Output terminals Used to connect output devices.
(2) Expansion I/O con- This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion I/O
necting cable Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrangements,
use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Output indicators Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when output is ON.

The first word of output words allocated to the Expansion Output Unit is indicated by CIO n.
 8-point Output Units (CP1W-8E)

COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
CIO n
 16-point Output Units (CP1W-16E)
NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07 NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC
CIO n CIO n+1

NC : No connection
 Units with 32 Output Points (CP1W-32E)
Unit Upper Terminal Block
CIO n CIO n+1
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 NC NC NC
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1
Unit Lower Terminal Block
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
CIO n+2 CIO n+3

NC : No connection

3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units

Units with 20 I/O Points Units with 40 I/O Points

CP1W-20EDR1/EDT/EDT1 CP1W-40 EDR/EDT/EDT1

(1) Input terminals
(2) Expansion I/O (1) Input terminals
connecting cable (2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
(5) Expansion
connector (5) Expansion
connector

3
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units


(1) Input terminals Used to connect input devices.
(2) Expansion I/O This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion I/O
connecting cable Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrangements,
use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Output terminals Used to connect output devices.
(4) Input indicators Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(6) Output indicators Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is ON.

The first word of input words allocated to the Expansion I/O Unit is indicated by CIO m and the first
word of the output words by CIO n.
 20-point I/O Units (CP1W-20ED)

• Input (Unit Upper Terminal Block)

COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC : No connection
CIO m
• Output (Unit Lower Terminal Block)

00 01 02 04 05 07
COM COM COM 03 COM 06
CIO n
 40-point I/O Units (CP1W-40ED)

• Input (Unit Upper Terminal Block)
CIO m CIO m+1
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO m CIO m+1

NC : No connection
• Output (Unit Lower Terminal Block)
CIO n CIO n+1
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO n CIO n+1

NC : No connection

3-2-4 I/O Specifications

This section describes the I/O specifications common to all Expansion I/O Units.
I/O Specifications

 Input Specifications
(CP1W-8ED/20EDR1/20EDT/20EDT1/40EDR/40EDT/40EDT1)
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC, +10%, -15%
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input current 5 mA typical 3
ON voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF voltage 5.0 VDC max.

ON response time 1 ms max.*
OFF response time 1 ms max.*
Circuit configuration IN
Output indicator
Internal
750Ω
4.7kΩ
IN
circuits
COM
* The response time is the delay caused by hardware. The delay set in the PLC Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms)
must be added to this value. For the CP1W-40EDR/EDT/EDT1, a fixed value of 16 ms must be added.

Do not apply voltage in excess of the rated voltage to the input terminal.

 Output Specifications for Relay Outputs

(CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/32ER/40EDR)
Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Service Electrical Resistive 150,000 operations (24 VDC)
life of load
relay Inductive 100,000 operations (240 VAC, cosφ = 0.4)
load
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON response time 15 ms max.
OFF response time 15 ms max.
Circuit configuration
OUT
Output indicator
Internal OUT
circuits
COM 250 VAC, 2A,

24 VDC, 2 A
max.
• Estimating the Service Life of Relays

The service life of output contacts is as shown in the following diagram.
120-VAC resistive load

300
24 VDC, τ = 7 ms
200
120 VAC COSφ = 0.4
240 VAC COSφ = 0.4
100
24-VDC/240-VAC resistive load
50
Life (× 104)
30
20
10
5
3
2
Switching frequency: 1,800 operations/hour
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5
Contact current (A)
• Restrictions of CP1W-16ER/32ER
Limit the output load current to satisfy the following derating curve.
CP1W-16ER/32ER
Output load current(%)

100
50
43 55
Ambient temperature (˚C)

• CP1W-32ER’s maximum number of simultaneously ON output points is 24 (75%).
Relation between Number of ON Outputs and

Ambient Temperature (CP1W-32ER)
Number of inputs ON
simultaneously (%)

75
0
55
Ambient temperature (˚C)
According to the ambient temperature, there are restrictions on power supply voltage and output load 3
current for the CPU Units connected with the Expansion I/O Units (CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/
32ER/40EDR). Use the PLC in the range of the power supply voltage and output load current as show

below.
• The ambient temperature is restricted for the CPU Units (CP1E-N/NAD-).
Derating curve of the output load current for Expansion I/O Units (CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/
32ER/40EDR).
Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to
CP1E-N30DR-D CP1E-N40DR-D CP1E-N30DT-D CP1E-N40DT-D
100% 100% 100% 100%

Power
Power voltage:
Power voltage: voltage:
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC 21.6 VDC
21.6 VDC 21.6 VDC
50% 50% 50% 50%
Power
Power voltage:
Power voltage: Power voltage:
voltage: 20.4 VDC 20.4 VDC
20.4 VDC 20.4 VDC
0% 0%
0% 0% 35 45 55°C 35 45 55°C
35 45 55°C 30 45 50 55°C Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature
Connected to
Connected to Connected to
CP1E-N60DR-D
CP1E-NA20DT-D CP1E-NA20DR-A
CP1E-N60DT-D
100% 100% 100%
Power voltage: Power voltage: 80%

21.6VDC 21.6VDC
50% 50%
Power voltage: Power voltage:
20.4VDC 20.4VDC
0% 0% 0%
40 45 55˚C 40 45 55˚C 50 55˚C
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Ambient temperature

 Output Specifications for Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)

Specification
Item CP1W-32ET CP1W-20EDT CP1W-16ET CP1W-8ET
CP1W-40EDT
CP1W-32ET1 CP1W-20EDT1 CP1W-16ET1 CP1W-8ET1
Maximum 4.5 to 30 VDC 4.5 to 30 VDC 24 VDC +10%/-5% 4.5 to 30 VDC 4.5 to 30 VDC
switching 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output
capacity*1 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common
3.6 A/Unit 7.2 A/Unit 1.8 A/Unit 3.6 A/Unit 1.8 A/Unit
Leakage 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max.
current
Residual 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max.
voltage
ON response 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max.
time
OFF response 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max.
time At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/
-5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA
Maximum 16 points 24 points 8 points 16 points 8 points
number of (100% load) (100% load) (100% load) (100% load) (100% load)
simultaneously
ON outputs
Fuse*2 1 fuse/common
Circuit Sinking Sourcing
configuration
Output indicator Output indicator
OUT
L
COM(+)
L Internal 24 VDC/
Internal OUT 24 VDC/ circuits 4.5 to 30 VDC
circuits 4.5 to 30 VDC
OUT
L
COM(–) L
OUT
*1 If the ambient temperature is maintained below 50ºC, up to 0.9 A/common can be used.
(A)
0.9
0.8
Total current per common
0 50 55 (˚C)
Ambient temperature
*2 The fuse cannot be replaced by the user. Replace the Unit if the fuse breaks due to an short-circuit or overcur-
rent.

Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity.

Programming Device
This section describes the features of the CX-Programmer used for programming and
debugging PLCs, as well as how to connect the PLC with the Programming Device.
4
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-1-1 Applicable Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-2 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-1-3 Operating Environment and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1-4 Features of the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-1-5 Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-2 Connecting by USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-2-1 Connecting by USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-2-2 Installing the USB Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-3 Connection Method with a Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

4 Programming Device
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for

CP1E
A programming device is a software application for initializing, programming, monitoring, and debug-
ging PLCs. This section describes the programming device used by CP1E.
4-1-1 Applicable Programming Devices

The programming devices in the following table are used to program and monitor the CP1E Unit.
IBM PC/AT or
equivalent
CX-Programmer
USB
CP1E CPU Unit
Compatible CX- Saved pro-

Unit version of Support for Applicable
Product Model Programmer gram file Reference
CP1E CPU Unit Smart Input CPU Unit
versions extension
CX-Programmer WS02- Version 8.2 or Version 1. Not .CXP Refer to the CP1E-20D-
(CX-One) CXPC1-V8 higher (See supported CX-Program- CP1E-30D-
CXONE- note.) mer Operation CP1E-40D-
AL01C-V3 Manual (Cat.
No. W446).
WS02- Version 9.03 or Version 1. Supported CP1E-E10D-
CXPC1-V9 higher CP1E-20D-
CXONE- CP1E-30D-
AL01C-V4 CP1E-40D-
CP1E-N60D-
CP1E-NA20D-
CXONE- Version 9.42 or Version 1. Supported All units are sup-
AL01C-V4 higher ported
Micro PLC Edition WS02- Version 8.2 or Version 1. Not .CXP Described in CP1E-20D-
CX-Programmer CXPC2-V8 higher supported this section. CP1E-30D-
(CX-One Lite) CXONE- CP1E-40D-
LT01C-V3
WS02- Version 9.03 or Version 1. Supported CP1E-E10D-
CXPC2-V9 higher CP1E-20D-
CXONE- CP1E-30D-
LT01C-V4 CP1E-40D-
CP1E-N60D-
CP1E-NA20D-
WS02- Version 9.42 or Version 1. Supported All units are sup-
CXPC2-V9 higher ported
CXONE-
LT01C-V4
CX-Programmer WS02- Version 1.0 Version 1. Supported .CXE CP1E-20D-
for CP1E CXPC3 CP1E-30D-
CP1E-40D-
Note 1 To use CX-Programmer version 8.2 with a CP1E CPU Unit, the CX-One version 3 auto-update must be
installed.
2 Use the CX-Programmer version 9.12 or higher, when CP1W-CIF41 is applied.
• The CX-Programmer for CP1E and CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) can be used at the same time.
• The CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) and the CX-Programmer for CP1E can be installed on
the same computer and both applications can be run at the same time.


• This section describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC Edition CX-
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP1E

Programmer version 9.03 or higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E. In the remainder of this sec-
tion, “CX-Programmer” refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer version 9.03 or
higher/CX-Programmer for CP1E.
When using the full version of CX-Programmer provided in CX-One, refer to the CX-Program-
mer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446).
• A Programming Console cannot be used for the CP1E. Use the CX-Programmer.
• The windows described in this section are the windows using the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
When using the CX-Programmer or the Micro PLC Edition CX-Programmer, the specification
may be different. Check the window specifications sufficiently.
Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446) for details.
 Using Project Files Saved with the CX-Programmer (.CXP) on the CX-
Programmer for CP1E
The CX-Programmer for CP1E cannot open a .CXP project created on the CX-Programmer (CX-
One/CX-One Lite). Use programming from a project saved in a .CXP file on the CX-Programmer for
CP1E according to the following procedure.
4
1 Start the CX-Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite) and CX-Programmer for CP1E together.
4-1-2 CX-Programmer
2 Copy the rungs of the program to be used from the Ladder Programming Window of the CX-
Programmer (CX-One/CX-One Lite), and paste them into the CX-Programmer for CP1E.
Files created with the CX-Programmer for CP1E (.CXE) can be opened with CX-Programmer
version 8.2 and higher.
4-1-2 CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer is a basic software application for creating and debugging PLC programs.
Programming Tasks Ladder diagrams
Programming functions
CX-Programmer
Monitoring Debugging and maintenance functions
PLC Setup CPU Unit parameters

4-1-3 Operating Environment and System Configuration

The following system is required to operate the CX-Programmer. Make sure your system provides the
following conditions and has the necessary components.
Item Description
Supported computer IBM PC/AT or equivalent
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive One or more
Supported operating systems Windows XP (Service Pack 3 or higher), Vista, 7 or 8
Note Except for Windows XP 64-bit version.
CPU Pentium II 333 MHz or faster
RAM 256 MB min., 512 MB or more recommended
Required hard disk space 600 MB min.
Display 800 x 600 SVGA min.
PLC and connection port USB port
4-1-4 Features of the CX-Programmer
Simple Menu Configuration

• With two menu levels, menu commands can be easily found.
• Options have been simplified.
Smart Input Mode That Automatically Displays Candidates
 Automatic Instruction Candidate Function

When the first letter of the instruction mnemonic is input, possible instructions are automatically dis-
played.
Example: Press the

M Key. :
Instructions starting with “M”

will be displayed.

 Automatic Address Increment Function

The addresses are automatically incremented to the addresses input last time by 1.
The addresses of inputs and outputs are incremented by 1 respectively.

• +1 bit for a bit address
• +1 word for a word address
Example: When the previous

address was W0.01.
The address is automatically

incremented and W0.02 is displayed.
 System-defined Symbol List

Condition Flags are also displayed in a list as candidates.
4
4-1-4 Features of the CX-Programmer

Condition flags are displayed
in a list as candidates.
 Automatic Symbol Candidate Function

When inputting symbol names, symbol candidates are automatically displayed based on the first
letter.
Example: Enter “1”.
The symbols with addresses

that start with an “1” are
displayed in a list.

Instructions Can Be Copied with Automatic Address Incrementing
 Automatic Address Incrementing

A copied group of ladder instructions can be pasted with a specified address offset (e.g., 16 bits).
Instructions can be reused with

automatic address incrementing
Bit address + n (e.g., 16)

Word address + m (e.g., 10)
 Automatic Generation of Symbol Names and I/O Comments

If there is a symbol name or I/O comment when instructions are copied, new symbols and I/O com-
ments will also be automatically generated.
Example: Example:
Sensor 02 was automatically LAMP_Blue_1 was automatically
Automatic address generated from symbol name Sensor01. generated from symbol name LAMP_Blue.
incrementing
Example:
ALARM_1 was automatically generated from
symbol name ALARM.

4-1-5 Installing the Software

This section provides a simple description of how to install the CX-Programmer on the hard disk of a
computer.
Preparing for Installation

Check the following items before beginning with the installation.
 Available Hard Disk Space
The CX-Programmer can be installed on the hard disk only. At least 600 MB of hard disk space is
required. Make sure that there is enough space available.
 Windows Environment and Installation Destination
The CX-Programmer is a software application for a Windows operating environment. The software
is installed on top of Windows. Make sure that Windows Vista, XP or Windows 2000 is installed and
functioning correctly on the computer.
 USB Port 4
To transfer ladder programs from the computer to the CP1E and to use the monitoring functions via
the USB port, enable the computer’s USB port. Refer to the computer’s manual for information on
4-1-5 Installing the Software

enabling the USB port.
Installation Procedure
This section describes how to install the software on a computer using the following drive configuration
as an example.
C drive: Hard disk drive
D drive: CD-ROM drive
1 Start Windows and insert the CX-Programmer Master Disk in the CD-ROM drive.
The installation program will be started by the computer’s auto-run function. If the installation
program does not start, select Specify File Name and Run from the Windows Start Menu,
enter “d:\setup” and click the OK Button.
2 Complete the installation process following the instructions provided on-screen.

Log on as a user with Administrator privileges when uninstalling.
Uninstalling the CX-Programmer

Uninstall the CX-Programmer when it is no longer required. Uninstall the application using Add and
Remove Applications in the control panel.

Log on as a user with Administrator privileges when uninstalling.

4-2 Connecting by USB

This section describes how to connect a computer running the CX-Programmer and the CP1E CPU
Unit.
4-2-1 Connecting by USB
Preparations for Connection

The USB driver must be installed in the computer to connect the PLC to the computer using the USB
port. Refer to 4-2-2 Installing the USB Driver for the installation of the USB driver.
Connection Methods
Using commercially available USB cable, connect the CX-Programmer to the peripheral USB port on
the CPU Unit.
CX-Programmer
USB port
B connector
A connector CP1E CPU Unit
Commercially available
USB cable*
Peripheral USB port

(Conforming to USB 2.0, B connector)
* Commercially available USB cable: 5 m max., for USB 2.0.
Connecting Cable
Use the following cable to connect the CP1E CPU Unit to the CX-Programmer.
Port at Network type (com-
Port at Unit Model numbers Length
computer munications mode)
Peripheral USB port USB port USB 2.0 (or 1.1) Commercially available USB 5m max.
(Conforming to USB 2.0, cable (A connector - B connector)
B connector)

Restrictions on Connecting by USB

The following restrictions apply to the connection of the CP1E to a computer due to the USB specifica-
tions. Keep these restrictions in mind when using the USB port.
• Only one CP1E CPU Unit can be connected by USB to a single personal computer. It is not possible
to connect multiple CP1E CPU Units simultaneously.
• Do not remove the USB cable while connected online. The application must be offline before the
cable is removed. The CX-Programmer will not go online simply by reinserting the USB cable. Place
the CX-Programmer offline before reinserting the USB cable, then place it online again.

• If the cycle time is too long, it may result the communication failure when CX-Programmer tries to
work online. In this case, click the Settings button on the right side of Network Type in the Change
PLC dialog box and increase the value in Response Timeout(s).
4-2-2 Installing the USB Driver

The USB driver for CP1E must be installed on the computer running the CX-Programmer in order to
connect the CP1E to the computer via USB.
When the personal computer is connected to the CP1E by USB cable, the personal computer automat-
ically recognizes the device and the USB driver installation is started.
Windows 2000 or Vista

Connect the computer’s USB port (1) and the CP1E CPU Unit’s peripheral USB port (3) with a USB
cable (2).
(1)
(3)
(2)

The USB driver will be automatically installed when the cable is connected.
If the software is not automatically installed, refer to Installing a Specified USB Driver later in this
section.
Windows XP
Turn ON the power supply to the PLC
1 and connect the peripheral USB port
on the PLC to the personal computer
using a USB cable. The computer will
automatically detect the device when
the cable is connected and display
the following message.
2 The following dialog box will be dis-

played. Select one of the options and
click the Next Button.

played. Select the Install the software
automatically (Recommended)
Option and click the Next Button.

• If the software cannot be installed automatically, refer to Installing a Specified USB Driver later
in this section.
• If the installation media is not inserted or the USB device driver is installed for another port, a
Driver List Dialog Box will be displayed. Make sure that the newest driver is selected and click
the Next Button.

4

Ignore the following dialog box if it is
4 displayed and click the Continue
Anyway Button.
The following dialog box will be dis-

5 played if the installation is completed
normally. Click the Finish Button.

Installing a Specified USB Driver

If the USB driver cannot be installed automatically, use the following procedure to install it.
 Windows Vista
Turn ON the power supply to the PLC and connect the peripheral USB port on the
1 PLC to the personal computer using a USB cable.

played. Select Locate and install
driver software (Recommended).

played. Select I don’t have the disc.
Show me other options.

4 played. Click the Browse Button,
specify the following location, and
then click the Next Button.
C:\Program Files\OMRON\CX-
Server\USB\wind2000_XP\Inf

Ignore the following dialog box if it is

5 displayed and select Install this
driver software anyway.

played when the driver software has
been installed successfully.

Confirming Installation
Check that the driver has been installed correctly after the installation.
From the desktop click Start and right-click My Computer. A pop-up menu will be displayed.
1
Select Properties.
2 The System Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.
Click the Hardware Tab and click the Device Manager Button.
3 The Device Manager Dialog Box will be displayed.
Double-click the USB (Universal Serial Bus) Controller Device.

4
Check that OMRON SYSMAC PLC Device is displayed. If it appears, then the USB driver has
5 been installed correctly.
Close the Device Manager Dialog Box and System Properties Dialog Box.
6 If OMRON SYSMAC PLC Device does not appear, reinstall the USB driver.
Uninstalling the USB Driver

If the USB driver installation fails for some reason or is cancelled in progress, the USB driver must be
reinstalled.
First, check whether installation failed.
Display the Device Manager on the computer.

1 If USB Device is displayed for Other Devices, it means that the USB driver installation has
failed.
Right-click on USB Device and select Delete to delete the driver. Reinsert the USB cable to
2 display the USB driver installation dialog box. Install the driver following the instructions again.

Re-installing the USB Driver

Right-click OMRON-PLC under Uni-
1 versal Serial Bus controllers and
select Properties. The properties will
be displayed.

4

Click the Reinstall Driver Button.
2 The Hardware Update Wizard Dialog
Box will be displayed. Install the
driver software using the procedure
described in 4-2-2 Installing the USB
Driver

4-3 Connection Method with a Serial Port

Using a built-in RS-232C port makes it possible to connect Support Software with serial communica-
tions.
Personal computer
CX-One (e.g., CX-Programmer)
D-Sub connector
(9-pin, female)
Recommended cable
XW2Z-200S-CV (2 m) or
XW2Z-500S-CV (5 m) D-Sub connector
(9-pin, male)
Connect the CX-Programmer to the built-in RS-232C port by XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV RS-232C

cable.
Connection Method
Connect the Programming Device using the Connecting Cable that is appropriate for the serial commu-
nications mode of the computer and CPU Unit.
Computer Connecting Cable CP1E CPU Unit
Connector Model Length Connector Serial communications mode
D-Sub 9 pin,male XW2Z-200S-CV 2m D-Sub 9 pin, female(With Host Link
XW2Z-500S-CV 5m a built-in RS-232C port or (SYSWAY)
a CP1W-CIF01 mounted
in option board slot)

Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install and wire CP1E Units.
5-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5
5-2-1 Installation Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2-2 Unit Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-3 I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5-1 Fail-safe Circuits

This section describes the fail-safe circuits that must be set up outside the CP1E.
Always set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous conditions in the event of errors
in the CP1E CPU Unit or external power supply.
In particular, be careful of the following points.
Timing of Supplying Power to the PLC and the Controlled System

If the PLC’s power supply is turned ON after the controlled system’s power supply, outputs in Units
such as DC Output Units may momentarily not function properly.
To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the power supply to the controlled sys-
tem from going ON before the power supply to the PLC itself.
Safety Circuit for Errors (Outputs Turned OFF)

When any of the following errors occur, PLC operation (program execution) will stop and all outputs
from the Units will be turned OFF.
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• A fatal error (memory error, I/O bus error, too many I/O points error, program error, cycle time
exceeded error, or FALS error)
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the system in the event
of an error that stops PLC operation.
Safety Circuit after a Malfunction (When an Output Remains ON)

It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal circuitry of the Output Unit,
such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Always add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to
ensure the safety of the system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
External Interlock Circuits

When the PLC controls operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor and
if there is any possibility of an accident or mechanical damage due to faulty PLC operation, provide an
external interlock such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from
turning ON at the same time.
Example:
Interlock Circuits A circuit like the one shown in the dia-
MC2 Motor
gram on the left is required to prevent
100.00
MC1 clockwise outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being
operation ON at the same time even if both PLC
CP1E outputs CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01
100.01
MC1 Motor are both ON.
MC2 counterclock
wise operation

5-2 Installation
This section describes the environmental factors that must be considered and the installation location
of each Unit.
Installation Environment
Do not install the Unit in the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0ºC or higher than 55ºC.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than 90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
5-2 Installation
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
5
Always enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.
Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels

When the CP1E is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to provide proper ambient con-
ditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
 Installation Orientation
When installing the CP1E in a control panel, it must be installed with the side with indicators and
communications ports facing the front to ensure proper heat dissipation.
OK

Not possible
 Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance

• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC as much as possible
from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of 1.0 to 1.6 m above the
floor.
WARNING
Do not touch the power supply or the area around the I/O terminals while
power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF.
Doing so may result in burns.

After the power supply has been turned OFF, wait until the PLC has sufficiently cooled before
touching it.

 Improving Noise Resistance

Leave space between the CP1E and control panel or other devices to allow adequate dissipation of
heat generated by the power supply.
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
Power Line
200 mm min.
SYSMAC CP1E
200 mm min.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
5-2 Installation
 Temperature Control
The ambient operating temperature around the CP1E must be between 0 and 55ºC. Observe the
following precautions.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of heat such as heaters, 5
transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55ºC, install a cooling fan or air conditioner.

Fan
Control panel
SYSMAC
CP1E
Louver

5-2-2 Unit Arrangement

This section describes how to arrange the CP1E Units.
As shown in the following diagrams, Units can be arranged in one or two rows when Expansion I/O
Units or Expansion Units are used.
Arrangement in One Row

Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be installed in a side-by-side arrangement.
CP1E CPU Unit
CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

When connecting CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit with AC
power, provide a space of approximately 10 mm between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
If sufficient space cannot be provided between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit, use the PLC in an ambient temperature of 0 to 50°C.
Arrangement in Two Rows

The Units can be arranged in two rows using the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (800 mm).
CP1W-CN811 I/O
Connecting Cable

I/O Connecting Cable can be used in one place only in each CP1E PLC. It cannot be used in
more than one place in the same CP1E PLC.

5-2-3 Installation
This section describes how to install the CP1E.
Dimensions and Installation Height
 Dimensions
• E-type and N/NA-type CPU Units
W1 85
W2
8
5-2 Installation
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
5
Model number W1 W2
5-2-3 Installation
CP1E-E10D- 66 56
CP1E-14D- 86 76
CP1E-20D- 86 76
CP1E-30D- 130 120
CP1E-40D- 150 140
CP1E-N60D- 195 185
CP1E-NA20D- 130 120
• ES-type and NS(1)-type CPU Units
W1 78.6
W2
8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
Model number W1 W2
CP1E-E14SD- 86 76
CP1E-E20SD- 86 76
CP1E-30S(1)D- 130 120
CP1E-40S(1)D- 150 140
CP1E-60S(1)D- 195 185

 Installation Height
The installation height is approximately 90 mm.
When a cable is connected to an Option Board, however, the additional height must be included.
Always allow for the additional height when considering the depth of the control panel in which the
PLC is to be mounted.
Installation Methods
There are two installation methods.
 DIN Track Installation

• Units can be mounted to PEP-50N (50 cm) or PEP-100N/100N2 (100 cm) DIN Tracks.
• Units can be moved and removed easily.
• The installation height in the control panel will be increased depending on the type of DIN tracks
used.
 Surface Installation
Units can be directly mounted in the control panel using M4 screws.
Installation Example
 DIN Track Installation

Secure the DIN Track with screws in at least three places.
DIN Track
Secure with screws
A CP1E CPU Unit and CP-series Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be mounted using
M4 screws. For restrictions on the number of Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units that can be
connected, refer to 2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
DIN Track Installation
1 Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to
release them, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
Release

2 Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching (1) the top of the Units on the Track and
then pressing (2) in at the bottom of the Units, as shown below.
(1)
DIN Track
(2)
5-2 Installation
3 Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in place.
5-2-3 Installation
Mounting Brackets
 DIN Track
Secure the DIN Track to the control panel using M4 screws at interval of 210 mm or less (6 holes or
fewer). The tightening torque is 1.2 N·m.
PFP-100N2 28-25 × 4.5 long holes

16
4.5
30±0.3 27 zz 29.2
15 25 25 25 25 15 1 1.5
10 10
1000
PFP-100N/50N 7.3±0.15
4.5
35±0.3 27±0.15
15 25 25 25 25 15(5)* 1
10 10
1000(500)*
*PFP-50N dimensions are given in parentheses.

 End Plate
Use the PFP-M End Plates to secure the Units so that they do not move towards one end or the
other of the DIN Track.
Surface Installation
• Create the mounting holes in the mounting surface as shown in the dimensions diagrams.
• Align the CP1E CPU Unit with the mounting holes and secure it in place with M4 screws.
 Surface Installation Mounting Hole Pitch

• CP1E E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units or Expansion I/O Units with 32 or 40 I/O
Points
Mounting hole
Unit
pitch A (mm)
A
CP1E CPU Units E/N30(S) CPU Unit 120±0.5
E/N40(S) CPU Unit 140±0.5
CP1E E30/40/60(S), E/N60(S) CPU Unit 185±0.5
N30/40/60(S) or NA20
100mm CPU Unit NA20 CPU Unit 120±0.5
Expansion I/O Unit with
32 or 40 I/O Points Expansion I/O Units Unit with 32 I/O 140±0.2
points
Unit with 40 I/O 140±0.2
8mm points
• CP1E E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units, Expansion I/O Units with 8, 16, or 20 I/O Points, and
Expansion Units
Mounting hole
Unit
pitch A (mm)
CP1E CPU Units E10 CPU Unit 56±0.5
E/N14(S) CPU Unit 76±0.5
E/N20(S) CPU Unit 76±0.5
A
Expansion I/O Units Unit with 8 input 56±0.2
points
CP1E E10/14/20(S) Unit with 8 output 56±0.2
or NA14/20 CPU Unit points
Expansion I/O Unit
100mm
with 8, 16, or 20 I/O Unit with 16 output 76±0.2
Points
Expansion Unit points
Unit with 20 I/O 76±0.2
points
8mm
Analog I/O Units Analog I/O 76±0.2
Analog input
Analog output
Temperature Sensor Except CP1W-TS004 76±0.2
Units CP1W-TS004 140±0.2

Using Wiring Ducts

Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts. Install the ducts so that it is easy to wire the
I/O Units through the ducts. It is handy to have the ducts at the same height as the Racks. Use mount-
ing bases if necessary to adjust the heights.
81.6~89.0mm
Duct
20mm min.
CPU
Rack
30mm
Unit DIN Track 30mm Mounting bracket
40mm
Duct
20mm min.
Duct
5-2 Installation
Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
M4: 1.2 N·m
M3: 0.5 N·m
5
 Routing Wiring Ducts
5-2-3 Installation
Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any other objects, (e.g.,
ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to provide enough space for air circulation
and replacement of Units.
Input duct Output duct Power duct
200 mm min.
Breaker
CP1E Fuse
Power
equipment,
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Fuses, timers,
relays, etc. Terminal
(Not heat- blocks for Terminal blocks
generating PLC for power
equipment or equipment
power
equipment.)

5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

This section describes how to connect Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.
Connection Methods
1 Remove the cover from the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s expansion connector. Use a
flat-head screwdriver to remove the cover from the Expansion I/O Connector.
Expansion Connector
Cover
(1) Remove
2 Insert the Expansion I/O Unit’s connecting cable into the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s
expansion connector.
IN
OUT
(2) Insert
3 Attach the cover to the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s expansion connector.
IN
OUT
(3) Attach

Precautions on Connecting Units

The following restrictions apply to the CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units that can be
connected to CP1E CPU Units.
 Maximum Number of Connectable Units

With an E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Unit, a total of up to three Expansion I/O Units
and Expansion Units can be connected to one CPU Unit. It is not possible to connect Expansion I/O
Units and Expansion Units to E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units.
5-2 Installation
5
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

5-3 Wiring
This section describes wiring methods for the CPU Unit.
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure

Make sure that the power supply is OFF before beginning wiring.
1. Prepare the parts required for wiring. Prepare crimp terminals and cables for −
wiring.
2. Connect the power supply terminals. Connect power supply to power supply Refer to 5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply
terminals L1 and L2/N. and Ground Lines.
Ground to 100 Ω or less. Refer to 5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply

3. Ground the ground terminal( ). and Ground Lines.
4. Connect the input terminals. Connect sensors and switches to the Refer to 5-3-3 I/O Wiring.
terminals.
5. Connect the output terminals. Connect loads to the terminals. Refer to 5-3-3 I/O Wiring.
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines
Wiring AC Power Supply and Ground

100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
R S
MCCB
Upper Terminal Block
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
LG: Functional ground terminal GR: Protective ground terminal
Ground to 100 Ω or less
• Wire a separate circuit for the power supply circuit so that there is no voltage drop from the inrush
current or startup current that flows when other equipment is turned ON.
• When several CP1E PLCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the PLCs on separate cir-
cuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush current or incorrect operation of the circuit breaker.

 AC Power Supply Wiring

• Use twisted-pair power supply cables to prevent noise from the power supply lines.
Adding a 1:1 isolating transformer reduces electrical noise even further.
• Consider the possibility of voltage drops and the allowable current, and always use thick power
lines.
• Use round crimp terminals for AC power supply wiring.
6.2 mm max.
• Use a power supply within the allowable voltage fluctuation range (85 to 264 VAC).
 Grounding
• Always ground the ground terminal to 100 Ω or less to protect against electric shock and incorrect
operation from electrical noise.
• If one phase of the power supply is grounded, connect the grounded phase to the L2/N terminal.
5-3 Wiring
• The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a dedicated ground line (2
mm2 min.) of 100 Ω or less.
• The line ground terminal (LG) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If noise is a significant source of
errors or if electrical shocks are a problem, connect the line ground terminal (LG) to the ground
terminal (GR) and ground both with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less. 5
• To prevent electrical shock when short-circuiting between the LG and GR terminals, always use a
ground of 100 Ω or less.
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines

• Do not connect ground lines to other devices or to the frame of a building. Doing so will reverse
the effectiveness of the ground and instead have a bad influence.
 Isolation Transformer
The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise in power supply lines.
Ground noise can be further reduced by providing the power supply through a 1:1 isolating trans-
former. Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer.
WARNING
Tighten the AC power supply terminal screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.
Loose screws may result in fire or malfunction.

• Loose pieces of wires may fall in the area when wiring. To prevent these pieces from entering
into the Unit, leave the label on the top of the Unit while wiring.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation.
• The power supply terminals are located at the top of the Unit. Do not connect a power supply
to the 24-VDC external supply terminals on the bottom of the Unit. Internal circuits may be
damaged if power is supplied to these terminals.

Wiring DC Power Supply and Ground
24VDC
+ -
MCCB
Upper Terminal Block

+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
GR:Protective ground terminal
Ground to 100Ω or less
• Wire a separate circuit for the power supply circuit so that there is no voltage drop from the inrush
current or startup current that flows when other equipment is turned ON.
• When several CP1E PLCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the PLCs on separate cir-
cuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush current or incorrect operation of the circuit breaker.
 DC Power Supply Wiring

• Use crimp terminals or solid wire for power supply wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals.
6.2mm max. 6.2mm max.
• M3 self-rising terminal screws are used. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.5
N·m.
• Use a power supply within the allowable voltage fluctuation range (20.4 to 26.4 VDC).
• The maximum power consumption is 20 W for N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units, 13 W for
N14/20 CPU Units, 9W for E10 CPU Units.
• There will be a inrush current of about five times that level when the power is turned ON.
 Grounding
• Always ground the ground terminal to 100Ω or less to protect against electric shock and incorrect
operation from electrical noise.
• The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a dedicated ground line
(2mm2 min.) of 100Ω or less.
• Do not connect ground lines to other devices or to the frame of a building. Doing so will reverse
the effectiveness of the ground and instead have a bad influence.

• Be sure not to reverse the positive and negative leads when wiring the power supply termi-
nals.
• Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies connected to DC
Power Supply Units to comply with EC(Low Voltage Directive) Directives.


• Loose pieces of wires may fall in the area when wiring. To prevent these pieces from entering
into the Unit, leave the label on the top of the Unit while wiring.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation.
• The power supply terminals are located at the top of the Unit.
5-3-3 I/O Wiring
I/O Wiring

• Never apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching
capacity for Output Units.
5-3 Wiring
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, always wire them correctly.
• Do not bend the I/O Connecting cable past its natural bending radius or pull in it with exces-
sive force. Doing so will damage the cable.
5
 Wire Sizes
• AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2) power lines are recommended.
5-3-3 I/O Wiring

• The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient temperature and
insulation thickness, as well as the gauge of the wire.
 Crimp Terminals
• M3 self-rising terminal screws are used.
• Use crimp terminals or solid wire for wiring.
• Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
• Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.5 N·m.
• Use crimp terminals (M3) having the dimensions shown below.
6.2 mm max. 6.2 mm max.
 Wiring
• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced.
• Make sure that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the I/O wiring in the same conduits or ducts as high-voltage or power lines. Inductive
noise can cause errors or damage.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.5 N·m.

Unit type Terminal width Terminal pitch

CPU Units 6.4mm 7.6mm
Expansion I/O Units 6.4mm 7.7mm
40ED/32E/20EDT
Expansion I/O Units 6.8mm 8.4mm
AD04/DA0/MAD/TS0/
SRT21/20EDR1/16E/8E
Terminal Terminal
width pitch
Example of Input Device Connections

Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input devices.
 DC Input Units
Connectable DC Input Devices (for DC Output Models)
Contact outputs Two-wire, DC outputs
IN
CP1E IN CP1E
COM Sensor power + COM 2
supply
NPN open-collector outputs NPN current outputs
+ Sensor power +
supply Current
Outputs CP1E regulator Outputs
IN IN CP1E
5mA/
5mA/7.5mA 2 7.5mA Sensor power +
0V
COM COM 2
0V supply
PNP current outputs Voltage outputs
+ Sensor power +
COM 2
supply
Outputs Outputs
IN CP1E IN CP1E
0V
5mA/7.5mA COM 1 Sensor power
0V supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices

having a voltage output.
+ Sensor power
supply
Outputs
IN CP1E
0V
COM 1

Precautions When Connecting a Two-wire DC Sensor

When using a two-wire sensor with a 24-VDC input device, check that the following conditions have
been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors.
(1) Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual voltage:
VON≤VCC −VR
(2) Relation between current when the PLC is ON and sensor control output (load cur-
rent):
IOUT(min)≤ION≤IOUT(max)
ION=(VCC −VR −1.5[PLC internal residual voltage]*)/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R.
The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R≤(VCC −VR)/(IOUT(min) −ION)
5-3 Wiring
Power W≥(VCC −VR)2/R × 4(allowable margin)
(3) Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF≥Ileak
Connect a bleeder resistor if Ileak is greater than IOFF. 5
Use the following equation to calculate the bleeder resistance constant.
5-3-3 I/O Wiring

R≤RIN × VOFF/(Ileak×RIN −VOFF)
Power W≥(VCC − VR)2/R × 4(allowable margin)
DC Input Unit
Two-wire sensor VR R RIN
VCC
Vcc: Power voltage

Vr: Sensor output residual voltage
Von: PLC ON voltage
Iout: Sensor control current (load current)
Voff: PLC OFF voltage
Ion: PLC ON current
Ileak: Sensor leakage current
Ioff: PLC OFF current
R: Bleeder resistance
Rin: PLC input impedance
(4) Precautions on Sensor Inrush Current

An incorrect input may occur due to sensor inrush current if a sensor is turned ON after the
PLC has started up to the point where inputs are possible.
Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON
and take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer delay after turn-
ing ON the sensor.

 Programming Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to CIO 0.00.
A 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in
the program.
After the Completion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on input bit CIO 0.01 will cause
output bit CIO 100.00 to turn ON.
0.00
TIM
100
#0001
T100 0.01
100.00
Output Wiring
 Protective Circuit for Load Short-circuits

If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output components and the printed cir-
cuit boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a
fuse with a capacity of about twice the rated output.
 Connecting to a TTL Circuit

A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of the transistor’s residual
voltage. Connect a TTL Unit through a CMOS-IC. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor for a
transistor output.
 Precautions on Inrush Current

When connecting a transistor or triac output to a load having a high inrush current (such as an
incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the
following methods to reduce the inrush current.
[Method1] [Method2]
R
OUT L OUT L
+ +
SYSMAC CP1E R SYSMAC CP1E
COM COM
Providing a dark current of approx. one-third of the Installing a limiting resistor

rated value through an incandescent lamp

5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls
I/O Signal Wiring

Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or conduits both inside and
outside of the control panel.
(1):I/O cables
(2):Power lines
(1) (1) (2)

(1) (2)
(2)
Floor ducts Conduit
5-3 Wiring
Suspended ducts
When wiring in the same duct, use shielded cables and connect the shields to the GR terminal to
reduce noise.
5
Inductive Loads
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge protector or diode in parallel with
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls

the load as shown below.
IN L
OUT
Diode
L DC input Relay output
Surge protector
COM COM
OUT
+
Relay output
Transistor output Diode
COM

Use surge protectors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge protector
Resistance : 50Ω
Capacitor : 0.47μF
Voltage : 200V
Diode
Breakdown voltage : 3 times load voltage

Mean rectification current :1A

Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring

Take the following points into account when externally wiring I/O, power supply, and power lines.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, do not combine I/O wires and other control wires in
the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
Low-current
cables
PLC I/O wiring
300 mm min.
PLC power supply Control cables
General control
circuit wiring
300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each
other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply

General control
PLC I/O wiring circuit wiring Power lines Steel metal
200 mm min.
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

The CP1E PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards (EN61131-2) of the EMC Directives.
However, noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards.
In such a case, a surge protector must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermea-
sures must be provided outside the PLC. Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depend-
ing on the devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc.
Following are examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
 Countermeasures (Refer to EN 61131-2 for details.)

• Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the
PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
• Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the
PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.

 Countermeasure Examples
• When switching an inductive load, connect a surge protector, diodes, etc., in parallel with the load
or contact as shown below.
Current
Circuit Characteristic Required element
AC DC
CR method If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is The capacitance of the capacitor must be
a time lag between the moment the cir- 1 to 0.5 μF per contact current of 1 A and
Inductive load cuit is opened and the moment the load resistance of the resistor must be 0.5 to
is reset. 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
Power C If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert These values, however, vary with the load
OK OK the arc killer in parallel with the load. If and the characteristics of the relay.
R
the supply voltage is 100 to 200V, insert Decide these values from experiments,
the arc killer between the contacts. and take into consideration that the
capacitance suppresses spark discharge
when the contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows into
the load when the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no polar-
5-3 Wiring
ity.
Diode method The diode connected in parallel with the The reversed dielectric strength value of
load changes energy accumulated by the diode must be at least 10 times as
the coil into a current, which then flows large as the circuit voltage value. The for-
Inductive load
--- OK into the coil so that the current will be ward current of the diode must be the
Power
converted into Joule heat by the resis- same as or larger than the load current. 5
tance of the inductive load. The reversed dielectric strength value of
This time lag, between the moment the the diode may be two to three times larger
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

circuit is opened and the moment the than the supply voltage if the surge pro-
load is reset, caused by this method is tector is applied to electronic circuits with
longer than that caused by the CR low circuit voltages.
method.
Varistor method The varistor method prevents the impo-
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
OK OK characteristic of the varistor. There is
Inductive load
time lag between the moment the circuit

Power
is opened and the moment the load is −
reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If
the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the varistor between the contacts.
• When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp, suppress the
inrush current as shown below.
[Method 1] [Method 2]
R
OUT L OUT L
+ +
R
COM COM
Providing a dark current of approx. one-third of Providing a limiting resistor

the rated value through an incandescent lamp

 Conditions for Meeting EMC Directives when Using CP-series Relay

Expansion I/O Units
EN61131-2 immunity testing conditions when using the CP1W-40EDR, CP1W-32ER, or CP1W-
16ER with a CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable are given below.
• Recommended Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core (Data Line Filter): 0443-164151 manufactured by Nisshin Electric
Minimum impedance: 90 Ω at 25 MHz, 160 Ω at 100 MHz
30
32 33
• Recommended Connection Method

(1) Cable Connection Method
(2) Connection Method

As shown below, connect a ferrite core to each end of the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable.

Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur with a CP1E PLC.
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-1-1 Errors and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-2 Checking Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6
6-1-5 Types of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-1-7 No Operation When Power Is Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-1-8 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-1-9 CPU Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-1-11 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-2-1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-2-2 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-2-3 Built-in Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-2-4 CX-Programmer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

6 Troubleshooting
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors

This section describes how to troubleshoot errors that occur in the CP1E CPU Units.
6-1-1 Errors and Remedies

Use the following procedure when an error occurs.
Error occurs
Check the indicators on the front of the CPU Unit or use the CX-
Check the indicators ··· Programmer to read the error status.
Identify the error from the indicators(refer to 6-1-5 Types of Errors)

Identify the error ··· or use the CX-Programmer to read the error status.
Implement countermeasures ··· Take measures to eliminate the error that occurred and to
prevent it from occurring again.
End
6-1-2 Checking Errors

The type of error that occurred can be determined by checking the indicators on the front of the CPU
Unit or by using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to 6-1-5 Types of Errors for details on the types of error status.
Checking the Indicators

E/NS(1) E/N/NA
POWER: Power supply Green
POWER
POWER
RUN: RUN or MONITOR mode
RUN Green
RUN
ERR/ALM: Shows the results of
ERR/ALM self-diagnosis.
ERR/ALM Red
INH INH: Outputs OFF

INH Yellow — — — —
PRPHL PRPHL: Peripheral USB port
PRPHL Yellow
communications — — — —
BKUP BKUP: Writing to backup memory
BKUP
(built-in EEPROM) Yellow — — — —
RS232C COMM: Built-in RS232C port

COMM
(RS232C) communications — — — —
RS485 RS485: Built-in RS485 port
communications — — — —
(NS1-type CPU Unit only)
Status Normal operation Operation is A non-fatal A fatal error

stopped in error has has occurred
PROGRAM occurred
mode

6 Troubleshooting
Checking Error Status with the CX-Programmer

Use the following procedure to read the error status.
1 Place the CX-Programmer online with the CPU Unit.
2 Double-click Error Log in the project tree in the main window.

The PLC Errors Window will be displayed. Click the Errors Tab. The current errors will be dis-
played on the Errors Tab Page.

6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status
You can check detailed error status using information registered in the Auxiliary Area.
The following error details are registered.
6
Area Description
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status

Error flags The Auxiliary Area contains flags that indicate the type of error.
Error information is provided for various types of error.
Error information The Auxiliary Area contains words that provide detailed information on current errors.
Error information is provided for various types of error.
Error code The Auxiliary Area contain a word that provides a code that describes the error that has
occurred.
The error code is stored in A400 for all errors.
If two or more errors occur at the same time, the highest (most serious) error code will be
stored in A400.
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information

If the error status could not be checked when the error occurred, it can be checked by reading error log
data.
The following information is stored in the error log.
• Error code (This is the same error code as is stored in word A400.)
• Error contents
• Time of occurrence

6 Troubleshooting
Error Log Information

A maximum of 20 error records will be stored in the error log.
If more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error record (in A100 to A104) will be deleted and the 19
records stored in A105 to A199 will be shifted by one, with the newest record being stored in A195 to
A199.
Error code Order of occurrence
Error Log Area
4102 1
A100 4 1 0 2 Error code
A101 Error contents
A102 Minutes, seconds
00F7 2 A103 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A104 Year, month
A105 0 0 F 7 Error code
A106 Error contents
A108 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A109 Year, month
009D 20
A195 0 0 9 D Error code

A196 Error contents
A198 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A199 Year, month
A300
Error Log Pointer
Note CP1E E(S)-type CPU Units do not support the clock function, so the time of occurrence cannot be con-
firmed. The display is always 01-01-01 01:01:01 Sunday.
Checking Error Log Information

The following methods can be used to check error log information with the CX-Programmer.
 CX-Programmer PLC Error Window

Check the error log by clicking the Error Log Tab in the PLC Errors Window of the CX-Programmer.
The error code is displayed here.
The example above shows that a memory error has occurred.

• Error code 80F1 → Memory error
• Error contents (A403) → 0400 → A403.10 is ON → Backup memory error

6 Troubleshooting
 Directly Monitoring the Area where Error Log Information is Stored
1 Connect the CX-Programmer online.
2 Read words A100 to A199.
3 Check the error status from the registered data.
6-1-5 Types of Errors

The type of error that has occurred can be identified by checking the indicators on the front of the CPU
Unit, or by using the CX-Programmer to check the error status.
The errors detected by the CPU Unit are listed in the following table.
Refer to 6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors for errors not detected by the CPU Unit.
• Error code storage word: The error code is stored in A400 when an error occurs.
• Error flags: Flags that indicate the type of error are allocated in the Auxiliary Area.
• Error information: There are words in the Auxiliary Area that provide specific information
on the meaning of error flags and information on the error location and
error details.

Built-in Error 6
RS-232C/ information
Error Opera-
ERR/ RS-485 Error
Error POWER RUN INH PRPHL BKUP code tion
ALM communi- flag
6-1-5 Types of Errors

(in A400) Error Word status
cations
status
Power supply error Opera-
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit − Not lit − − − − tion
stops.
CPU error (WDT Opera-
error)*1 Lit Not lit Lit − − − − − − − − tion
stops.
Peripheral USB port Opera-
communications Lit Lit Not lit − Not lit − − − − − − tion con-
error tinues.
Built-in RS-232C Opera-
port/Built-in RS-485 Lit Lit Not lit Not lit tion con-
− − − − − − −
port communica- tinues.
tions error
Fatal Memory − − − − 0x80F1 A401.15 Memory A403 Opera-
errors error Error tion
Lit Not lit Lit
*1*2 Location stops.
I/O bus error 0x80CA A401.14 Always A404
0x0A0A
Too many 0x80E1 A401.11 Always A407
I/O points 0x4000
error
Program 0x80F0 A401.09 Program A294
error Error to
Details A299
Cycle time 0x809F A401.08 − −
exceeded
error
FALS error 0xC101 to A401.06 − −
0xC2FF

6 Troubleshooting
Built-in Error
RS-232C/ information
Error Opera-
ERR/ RS-485 Error
Error POWER RUN INH PRPHL BKUP code tion
ALM communi- flag
(in A400) Error Word status
cations
status
Non- FAL − − − − 0x4101 A402.15 Exe- A360 Opera-
fatal instruction Lit Lit Flash- to cuted to tion con-
errors executed ing 0x42FF FAL A391 tinues.
*2 Number
Backup 0x00F1 A315.15 − −
memory
error
PLC setup 0x009B A402.10 − −
error
Option 0x00D2 A315.13 Error A424
Board error Option
(N/NA- Board
type only) Number
Battery error 0x00F7 A402.04 − −
Built-in ana- 0x008A A315.14 Built-in A434

log error analog
(NA-type I/O error
only) details
*1 The indicator status is the same for CPU errors and fatal errors, but they can be distinguished because a Programming
Device can be connected when a fatal error occurs, but not when a CPU error occurs.
*2 Refer to 6-1-8 Fatal Errors and 6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors for details on fatal and non-fatal errors.
Note The indicator status shows the status of the errors that have occurred in RUN or MONITOR mode.
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart

Confirm the error category by referring to the status of the CPU Unit indicators, investigate the cause
for the error in the error tables, and take corrective actions.
Problem?
POWER indicator lit? Check the power supply.

Not lit Refer to 6-1-7 and 6-2.
Lit
RUN indicator lit?

Not lit
Lit
ERR/ALM indicator lit? ERR/ALM indicator lit?

Not lit Not lit
Flashing Lit
There is no error
in the CP1E.
A non-fatal error has occurred. Check for other A fatal error has occurred.
Refer to 6-1-10. causes. Refer to 6-1-8.
Refer to 6-2.

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-7 No Operation When Power Is Supplied

First confirm that the POWER indicator (green) is lit.
 POWER Indicator Not Lit

The power supply may not match the Unit rating, wiring may not be correct, or the Unit may be faulty.
• Confirm the Unit rating (i.e., is it 24 VDC or 100 to 240 VAC?) and see if the supply power
matches the rating.
• Check the wiring to see if it is correct and that nothing is disconnected.
• Check the voltage at the power supply terminals. If the voltage is normal and the POWER indica-
tor is not lit, the Unit may be faulty. In that case, replace the Unit.

 POWER Indicator Flashing
There may be fluctuations in the power supply voltage, disconnected wiring, or poor contacts.
Check the power supply system and wiring.
 POWER Indicator Lit but No Operation

Check the RUN indicator if the POWER indicator is lit but the CPU Unit does not operate.
The CPU Unit may be on standby if the RUN indicator is not lit.
6-1-8 Fatal Errors

6
 CPU Unit Indicators
6-1-7 No Operation When Power Is Supplied

POWER
POWER RUN
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH —
ERR/AL PRPHL —
INH BKUP —
—: Irrelevant
PRPHL
BKUP
There may be a CPU error or a fatal error if operation stops (i.e., the RUN indicator turns OFF) and
the ERR/ALM indicator lights.
Data on fatal errors is displayed on the Errors Tab Page of the CX-Programmer’s PLC Errors Win-
dow.
Take corrective actions after checking error details based on the CX-Programmer display message
together with the Auxiliary Area Error Flags and error information.
• Errors are listed in order with the most serious errors first.
• If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code will be stored in
A400.
• If the IOM Hold Bit hasn’t been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all non-retained areas of I/O
memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than FALS occurs.
• I/O memory will be held when the I/O Memory Hold Bit is ON, but outputs will be turned OFF.

6 Troubleshooting
Memory Errors
Cause Remedy
An error has occurred in memory. See below.
One or more bits in A403 will turn ON to indicate where the
error has occurred.
See below for details.
• Memory Error Location
A403.00 is ON A checksum error has occurred in the Transfer the ladder program again.
ladder program. The power supply
was turned OFF when backing up the
user program to backup memory.
A403.04 is ON A checksum error has occurred in the Transfer the PLC Setup again.
PLC Setup.
 Reference
Error flag Memory Error Flag, A401.15
Error code (A400) 80F1
Error information Memory Error Location, A403
I/O Bus Error

An I/O bus error has occurred in data transfer between the CPU Units and Units connected to the I/O
bus.
Cycle the power supply. If operation is not restored when the power supply has been cycled, turn OFF
the power supply and check that connections are proper and that there is no damage.
Cause Remedy
An error occurred in data transfer • Cycle the power supply.
between the CPU Unit and an Expansion • If the problem persists, turn OFF the power supply and check the
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Connecting Cables between the Units to see if they are connected
(A value of 0A0A hex will be stored in properly.
A404.) • Check the Unit connections to be sure they are ok (e.g., that there
is no damage).
• After correcting the problem, turn ON the power to the Units again.
 Reference
Error flag I/O Bus Error Flag, A401.14
Error code (A400) 80CA
Error information I/O Bus Error Details, A404
Too Many I/O Points Error

The number of CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units connected exceeds the restriction
for the number of Units or words for the system configuration.
Turn OFF the power supply and reconfigure the system within the restrictions.
Cause Remedy
The number of CP-series Expansion Units and Connect a maximum of three Expansion Units or Expan-
Expansion I/O Units exceeds the restriction. sion I/O Units to N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units.
(A value of 4000 hex will be stored in A407.)

6 Troubleshooting
 Reference
Error flag Too Many I/O Points Flag, A401.11
Error code (A400) 80E1
Error information Too Many I/O Points Details, A407
Program Errors
A program error indicates a problem with the user program. Refer to the error information, check the
program, and correct the mistakes.
Clear the error once the problem has been corrected.
Cause Remedy

Instruction Processing Error (A295.08 turns ON) • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address
The instruction could not be executed because of when the program fails), check the specifications for
incorrect operand data, and the ER Flag was turned the relevant instruction, and set the correct operand
ON. (Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error data.
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
tion error.
Indirect DM Addressing BCD Error • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address
(A295.09 turns ON) when the program fails), and correctly set the content
The operand of indirect DM Area addressing in BCD for the indirectly addressed DM operand (BCD mode)
Mode did not contain a BCD value when the instruc- to BCD or change the specified destination. Alterna-
tion was executed, and the AER Flag was turned tively, change the indirect addressing to binary mode.
ON. (Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) tion error.
Illegal Area Access Error (A295.10 turns ON) • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address 6
The AER flag is ON because an illegal area was when the program fails) and take corrective actions so
specified for access when executing the instruction. that illegal area access errors will not occur.
6-1-8 Fatal Errors

(Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) tion error.
The following operations are considered illegal
access:
• Reading/writing the parameter area
• Writing to an area without memory installed
• Writing to a write-protected area
• Indirect DM addressing BCD error
No END Error (A295.11 turns ON) Insert an END instruction at the end of the program allo-
This error occurs when there is not an END instruc- cated to the task stored in A294 (task number when the
tion in the program. program fails).
Task Error (A295.12 turns ON) Create a task for the number stored in A294 (task num-
There is no specified interrupt task when an interrupt ber when the program fails).
is generated (input interrupt, high-speed counter
interrupt or scheduled interrupt.)
Differentiation Overflow Error Change the operating mode to PROGRAM mode and
(A295.13 turns ON) then return to MONITOR mode.
Differentiation instructions were repeatedly inserted
or deleted using the online editor and the system
restriction was exceeded.
Illegal Instruction Errors (A295.14 turns ON) Transfer the program again using the CX-Programmer.
Execution of an unexecutable instruction was
attempted.
UM Overflow Error (A295.15 turns ON) Transfer the program again using the CX-Programmer.
An attempt was made to execute a program that
exceeds the user program capacity.

6 Troubleshooting
 Reference
Error flag Program Error Flag, A401.09
Error information Program Error Details, A294 to A299
Cycle Time Exceeded Error

Cause Remedy
This error occurs when the cycle time • Change the program to reduce the cycle time.
PV exceeds the maximum cycle time • Change the maximum cycle time setting.
set in the PLC Setup. • Refer to the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time (A440) and
study the maximum cycle time.
For example, use the JUMP instruction to skip sections that are not
executed to shorten the cycle time.
• The cycle time exceeded error may occur during the following situa-
tion in the use of high-speed counter. Please check the input signal of
high-speed counter.
• The Z-signal is input at high-frequency.
• Change the direction of signal at high-frequency.
• Change the direction of target matching at high-frequency.
 Reference
Error flag Cycle Time Too Long Error, A401.08
Error code (A400) 809F
Error information −
Errors Created with FALS Instructions

Cause Remedy
FALS instruction executed C100 hex will be added to the FALS number (001 to 1FF hex) and the result will
(fatal error) in the program. be stored in A400 as the error code (C100 to C2FF hex).
Check the conditions for executing FALS instructions and remove any causes
for the user-defined error.
 Reference
Error flag FALS Error Flag, A401.06
Error code (A400) C101 to C2FF

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-9 CPU Errors

POWER
POWER RUN
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH —
ERR/AL PRPHL —
INH BKUP —

—: Irrelevant
PRPHL
BKUP
A CPU error or fatal error may have occurred if the ERR/ALM indicator lights during operation (RUN
mode or MONITOR mode), the RUN indicator turns OFF, and operation stops.
CPU Unit Errors

Cause Remedy
A WDT (watchdog) error occurred in the CPU Cycle the power supply.
Unit. The Unit may be faulty. Consult your OMRON representa- 6
(This does not occur in normal use.) tive.
6-1-9 CPU Errors

 Reference
Error flag −
Error code (A400) −
Note Just as when a CPU error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn OFF and the ERR/ALM indicator will
light when a fatal error occurs. Connecting the CX-Programmer, however, is possible for fatal
errors but not for CPU errors.
If the CX-Programmer cannot be connected (online), a CPU error has probably occurred.

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors

A non-fatal error has occurred if both the RUN indicator is lit and the ERR/ALM indicator is flashing
during operation (i.e., in RUN or MONITOR mode).

POWER
POWER RUN
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH —
ERR/AL PRPHL —
INH BKUP —
—: Irrelevant
PRPHL
BKUP
Information on the non-fatal errors can be obtained from the Errors Tab Page of the CX-Program-
mer’s PLC Errors Window.
Take corrective actions after checking error details using the display messages and the Auxiliary
Area Error Flags and error information.
• Errors are listed in order with the most serious errors first.
• If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code will be stored in A400.
Errors Created with FAL Instructions

Cause Remedy
A FAL instruction was executed in the program to Check the conditions for executing FAL instructions and
create a non-fatal error. remove any causes of the user-defined error.
(The executed FAL number 001 to 511 will be stored
in A360 to A391. The number 4 will be added to the
front of 101 to 2FF (which correspond to executed
FAL numbers 001 to 511) and the result will be
stored in A400 as error code 4101 to 42FF. )
 Reference
Error flag FAL Error Flag, A402.15
Error code (A400) 4101 to 42FF
Backup Memory Error

Cause Remedy
Writing to the backup memory (built-in EEPROM) Replace the CPU Unit when the backup memory (built-in
fails. EEPROM) has been written to more than 100,000 times.
(A315.15 will turn ON. )

6 Troubleshooting
 Reference
Error flag Backup Memory Error Flag, A315.15
PLC Setup Errors

Cause Remedy
A set value error occurred in the PLC Setup. Correct the PLC Setup with correct values.
 Reference

Error flag PLC Setup Error Flag, A402.10
Error code (A400) 009B
Option Board Errors (Only for N/NA-type CPU Units)

Cause Remedy
The Option Board is removed while the power is Turn OFF the power supply and then install the Option
being supplied. Board again.
(A315.13 will turn ON.)
6
 Reference
Option Board Error Flag, A315.13
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors

Error flag
Other Non-fatal Error Flag, A402.00
Error code (A400) 00D1
Battery Errors
Cause Remedy
If the PLC Setup is set to detect battery errors, this Check the battery connections.
error will occur when there is an error in the battery Select the Do not detect battery error Check Box in the
in the CPU Unit (i.e., the voltage is low or a battery PLC Setup setting if battery-free operation is being used.
is not mounted).
 Reference
Error flag Battery Error Flag, A402.04

6 Troubleshooting
Built-in Analog Errors (Only for NA-type)

Cause Remedy
For NA-type, when a built-in analog I/O error occurs. Restart the PLC .If this error still exists, please change unit.
 Reference
Built-in analog error, A315.14
Error flag
Other error flag, A402.00
Error code 008A
Error information Built-in analog I/O error details, A434
6-1-11 Other Errors
Communications Errors

POWER
POWER RUN
ERR/ALM —
RUN
INH —
ERR/AL PRPHL
INH BKUP —
—: Irrelevant
PRPHL
BKUP
Cause Remedy
An error has occurred in the communications • Check the cable wiring.
between the peripheral USB port and connected • Check the USB cable and replace it if necessary.
device.
An error has occurred in the communications • Confirm that the serial port 1/2 settings in the PLC Setup
between the serial port and connected device. are correct.
• Check the cable wiring.
• If a host computer is connected, check the serial port set-
tings and program in the host computer.
An error will be occurred if the cycle time is too • Start the CX-Programmer. Select Change Model from
long. the PLC Menu. The Change PLC Dialog Box will be dis-
played.
• Click the Settings Button on the right side of Network
Type. The Network Settings [USB] Dialog Box will be
displayed.
• Click the Network Tab and increase the value in
Response Timeout(s).

6 Troubleshooting
6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors

This section describes how to troubleshoot errors that occur in devices other than the CP1E CPU
Unit.
6-2-1 Inputs
No. Symptom Cause Remedy
1 Not all inputs turn ON or 1. External power is not supplied for the Supply power.
indicators are not lit. input.
2. Supply voltage is low. Adjust supply voltage to within
rated range.

3. Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws.
2 Not all inputs turn ON Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at Replace Unit.
even though the indicator the load or something else that caused an
is lit. overcurrent to flow.)
3 Not all inputs turn OFF. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
4 Specific input bit does not 1. Input device is faulty. Replace input devices.
turn ON. 2. Input wiring disconnected. Check input wiring
4. Too short ON time of external input. Adjust input device.
5. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
6
6. Input bit number is used for output Correct the ladder program.
instruction.
Specific input bit does not 1. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
6-2-1 Inputs
5
turn OFF. 2. Input bit number is used for output Correct the ladder program.
instruction.
6 Input irregularly turns 1. External input voltage is low or unsta- Adjust external input voltage to
ON/OFF. ble. within rated range.
2. Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures
against noise, such as:
• Install surge suppressor.
• Install insulation transformer.
• Install shielded cables
between the Input Unit and the
loads.
7 Error occurs in units of 8 1. Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws.
points or 16 points, i.e., 2. Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
for the same common
3. Faulty CPU Replace CPU Unit.
8 Input indicator is not lit in Faulty indicator or indicator circuit. Replace Unit.
normal operation.

6 Troubleshooting
6-2-2 Outputs
1 Not all outputs turn ON 1. Load is not supplied with power. Supply power.
2. Load voltage is low. Adjust voltage to within rated
range.
4. Unit failure caused by an overcurrent Replace Unit.
(possibly caused by a short at the
load).
5. Faulty I/O bus connector contact. Replace Unit.
6. Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
7. If the INH indicator is lit, the Output Turn A500.15 OFF.
OFF Bit (A500.15) is ON.
2 Not all outputs turn OFF Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
3 Output of a specific bit 1. Output ON time is too short because of Correct program to increase the
number does not turn ON a mistake in programming. time that the output is ON.
and indicator is not lit 2. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct program so that each
tions in a ladder program. output bit is controlled by only
one instruction.
4 Output of a specific bit 1. Faulty output device. Replace output device.
number does not turn ON 2. Break in output wiring. Check output wiring.
(indicator lit).
3. Loose terminal block screws. Tighten screws.
4. Faulty output bit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
5 Output of a specific bit 1. Faulty output bit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
number does not turn OFF 2. Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage Replace external load or add
(indicator is not lit). current or residual voltage. dummy resistor.
6 Output of a specific bit 1. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct the ladder program.
number does not turn OFF tions in ladder program.
(indicator lit). 2. Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
7 Output irregularly turns 1. Low or unstable load voltage. Adjust load voltage to within
ON/OFF. rated range.
2. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct program so that each
tions in ladder program. output bit is controlled by only
one instruction.
3. Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures
against noise, such as:
• Install surge protector.
• Install insulation transformer.
• Use shielded cables between
the output terminal and the
load.
8 Error occurs in units of 8 1. Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws.
points or 16 points, i.e., for 2. An overcurrent (possibly caused by a Replace Unit.
the same common. short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse for the output.
3. Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
4. Faulty CPU Replace CPU Unit.
9 Output indicator does not Faulty indicator. Replace Unit.
light during normal opera-
tion.

6 Troubleshooting
6-2-3 Built-in Analog

1 ERR/ALM indicator is lit. A non-fatal error has occurred. Refer to 6-1-10 .
 Analog Input
1 Conversion data does not 1. The input is not set for being Check PLC setup,set analog input to
change. used. “Use” and restart CP1E CPU Unit.
2. The input wiring is wrong. Correct wiring according to 3-1-3 .
3. The input device is not working. Using a tester, check to see if the
input voltage or current is changing.

4. there is a disconnection. Check A434.00 (AD0) or A434.01
(AD1) flug (open-circuit disconnec-
tion.)
2 Value does not change as 1. The input signal range setting is Correct the input signal range setting
intended. wrong. and restart CP1E CPU Unit.
2. The input device’s signal range Check the specifications of the input
does not match the input signal device, match the settings for the
range for the relevant input num- input signal ranges and restart CP1E
ber at the CP1E CPU Unit. CPU Unit.
3. When using the 4 mA to 20 mA Short VIN and I IN terminal.
range, the VIN and I IN terminal is
not shorten.
6
3 Conversion values are The input signals are being affected Insert a 0.01-μF to 0.1-μF ceramic
Inconsistent by external noise. capacitor or film capacitor between
the input’s VIN/I IN and COM termi-
6-2-3 Built-in Analog

nals.
Use averaging function.
 Analog Output
1 Analog output does not 1. The output is not set for being Check PLC setup,set analog output
change. used. to “Use” and restart CP1E CPU Unit.
2. The conversion value is set out- Set the data within the range.
side of the permissible range. Resolution: 1/6000
-10 to 10V: F448 to 0BB8 Hex
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 Hex
Resolution: 1/12000
-10 to 10V: E890 to 1770 Hex
Other ranges: 0000 to 2EE0 Hex
2 Output does not change as 1. The output signal range setting is Correct the output signal range set-
intended. wrong. ting and restart CP1E CPU unit.
2. The Analog I/O specifications of Change the output device.
the output device do not match
those of the CP1E CPU Unit
(e.g., input signal range, input
impedance).
3 Outputs are inconsistent. The output signals are being affected Try changing the shielded cable con-
by external noise. nection (e.g., the grounding at the
output device).

6 Troubleshooting
6-2-4 CX-Programmer Connection

Use the following procedure if the CX-Programmer cannot connect to the PLC.
Connecting via the Peripheral USB Port

The CX-Programmer
cannot connect.
Is the USB cable No

Insert the cable all the way in at both the
securely connected? personal computer and at the CPU Unit.
Yes
No Can the CX- Yes
Programmer be End
connected online?
Is the CX-Programmer No
Set the CX-Programmer network
network type set to USB? type to USB.
Yes
No Can the CX- Yes
Programmer be
connected online?
Replace the USB cable.
If the cycle time is too long, it may result the communication failure when CX-Programmer tries to work
online. In this case, click the Settings button on the right side of Network Type in the Change PLC dia-
log box and increase the value in Response Timeout(s).

Maintenance and Inspection
This section describes periodic inspections, the service life of the Battery, and how to
replace the Battery.
7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

This section describes periodic inspections and maintenance of CP1E PLCs.
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PLC’s functions in peak operating
condition.
7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections
 Required Tools
• Phillips screwdrivers
• Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
 Tools Required Occasionally

• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and hygrometer (humidity meter)
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection
Although the major components in CP-series PLCs have an extremely long life time, they can deterio-
rate under improper environmental conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the
required conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more frequent inspections will
be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.
 Battery
Item Life Remedy
Check whether the Battery Service life expectancy Replace the Battery when its service life has passed
has reached its service life is 5 years at 25ºC, less even if a Battery error has not occurred. The service life
(CP1W-BAT01 Battery). at higher temperatures. depends on the model and ambient temperature.
(From 1.5 to 5 years Refer to 7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type
depending on model and CPU Units.
ambient temperature.)

7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection
No. Inspection Criteria Remedy
points
1 Power sup- Check for voltage fluctua- Allowable voltage Use a voltage tester to check the
ply voltage tions at the power supply ter- range power supply at the terminals. Take
minals. AC power supply: necessary steps to bring voltage fluc-
85 to 264 VAC tuations within limits.
DC power supply:
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
2 I/O power Check for voltage fluctua- Voltages must be Use a voltage tester to check the
supply tions at the I/O terminals. within I/O specifica- power supply at the terminals. Take
tions for each Unit. necessary steps to bring voltage fluc-
tuations within limits.
3 Ambient Check the ambient tempera- 0 to 55°C Use a thermometer to check the tem-
7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

environment ture. (Inside the control panel perature and make sure that the
if the PLC is in a control ambient temperature remains within
panel.) the allowed range of 0 to 55ºC.
Check the ambient humidity Relative humidity Use a hygrometer to check the opera-
(inside the control panel if the must be 10% to tion humidity and ensure that the
PLC is in a control panel). 90% with no con- ambient humidity remains between
densation. 10% and 90%.
Make sure that condensation does
not occur due to rapid changes in
temperature.
Check that the PLC is not in Not in direct sun- Protect the PLC if necessary.
direct sunlight. light
Check for accumulation of No significant accu- Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings, mulation sary.
etc. 7
Check for water, oil, or chemi- No spray on the Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
cal spray. PLC sary.
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance

Check for corrosive or flam- No corrosive or Check by smell or use a sensor.
mable gases in the area of flammable gases
the PLC.
Check the level of vibration or Vibration and shock Install cushioning or shock absorbing
shock. must be within equipment if necessary.
specifications.
Check for noise sources near No significant noise Either separate the PLC and noise
the PLC. sources source or protect the PLC.
4 Installation Check that the Option Boards No looseness Correct any improperly installed con-
and wiring and cable connectors are fully nectors.
inserted and locked.
Check for loose screws in No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phillips
external wiring. screwdriver.
Check crimp connectors in Adequate spacing Check visually and adjust if neces-
external wiring. between connec- sary.
tors
Check for damaged external No damage Check visually and replace cables if
wiring cables. necessary.

7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions

Check the following when replacing any faulty Units discovered during inspections.
• Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF.
• Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
• If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as much detail as possible,
enclose this description with the Unit, and return the Unit to your OMRON representative.
• For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial alcohol, and carefully wipe the
contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint prior to remounting the Unit.

When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but also all other data
required for operation is transferred to or set in the new CPU Unit before starting operation,
including DM Area and HR Area settings.
If data area and other data are not correct for the user program, unexpected accidents may
occur.

7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-

type CPU Units
For CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Units, the data in the following areas may be unstable when the
power is turned ON.
Mount the CP1W-BAT01 Battery (sold separately) to an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit if data in the
following areas need to be retained after a power interruption.
• DM Area (D) (excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM backup function )
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

• Auxiliary Area related to clock function (A)
A Battery cannot be mounted to an E(S)-type CPU Unit.
The procedure to replace the Battery on an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit is given below.
Battery Service Life and Replacement Period

At 25ºC, the maximum service life for the Battery is five years whether or not power is supplied to the
CPU Unit while the Battery is installed.
The Battery’s lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures.
The following table shows the approximate minimum lifetimes and typical lifetimes for the backup Bat-
tery (total time with power not supplied).
Approx. maximum Approx. minimum
Model number Typical lifetime*
lifetime lifetime*
7
CP1E-ND- 5 years 13,000 hours 43,000 hours
CP1E-NAD- (1.5 years) (5 years)
* The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 55°C.
The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 25°C.
Memory Backup Time
5 years
4 years
CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit
3 years
2 years
1 year
Ambient temperature
25˚C 40˚C 55˚C
* This graphic is for reference only.

Low Battery Indications

The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the Battery is nearly discharged.
Flashing
When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect the CX-Programmer to the peripheral USB port and
read the error messages.
If a low Battery message appears on the CX-Programmer or the Battery Error Flag (A402.04) is ON,
first check whether the Battery is properly connected to the CPU.
If the Battery is properly connected, replace the Battery as soon as possible.
Once a low battery error has been detected, it will take 5 days (at an ambient temperature of 25°C)
before the Battery fails assuming that power has been supplied at least once a day.
You can prevent losing data in the RAM by ensuring that the CPU Unit power is not turned OFF until
the Battery is replaced.

• The low battery message will appear on the CX-Programmer and the Battery Error Flag
(A402.04) will turn ON only if the Detect Low Battery parameter in the PLC Setup has been set
to detect a low-Battery error.
If this setting has not been made, Battery errors will not be detected.
• The Battery will discharge faster at higher temperatures, e.g., 4 days at 40°C and 2 days at
55°C.
 Replacement Battery
Name: Battery Set
Model: CP1W-BAT01

Be sure to install a replacement Battery within two years of the production date shown on the
Battery’s label.
Production Date
CP1W-BAT01
09-03 Manufactured in March 2009.

Replacing the Battery

Use the following procedure to replace the Battery when the previous Battery has become completely
discharged.

We recommend replacing the Battery with the power OFF to prevent the CPU Unit’s sensitive
internal components from being damaged by static electricity. The Battery can be replaced with-
out turning OFF the power supply. To do so, always touch a grounded piece of metal to dis-
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

charge static electricity from your body before starting the procedure.
After replacing the Battery, connect a Programming Device and clear the Battery error.
1 Turn OFF the power supply to the N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit.

If the CPU Unit has not been ON, turn it ON for at least 30 minutes and then turn it OFF.
There is a capacitor inside the N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit that backs up memory when the
Battery is removed. If power is not turned ON for at least 30 minutes before replacing the Bat-
tery, the capacitor will not be fully charged and memory may be unstable before the new Battery
is inserted.
2 Open the compartment on the CPU Unit and carefully draw out the Battery. Remove the Battery
connector. Connect the new Battery, place it into the compartment, and close the cover.


• You must complete this procedure within 5 minutes after turning OFF the power to the CPU
Unit to ensure memory backup.
If the Battery is removed for more than 5 minutes, data retained by the I/O memory (excluding
the DM Area words saved to the backup memory) may be unstable.
• Never short-circuit the Battery terminals; never charge the Battery; never disassemble the Bat-
tery; and never heat or incinerate the Battery. Doing any of these may cause the Battery to
leak, heat, burn, or rupture, resulting in injury, fire, and possible loss of property.
Also, never use a Battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subject to shock. It
may leak.
UL standards require that batteries be replaced by experienced technicians. Always place an
experienced technician in charge of Battery replacement.
• Turn ON the power after replacing the Battery for a CPU Unit that has been unused for a long
time.
Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning ON the power even once after the Battery
is replaced may result in a shorter Battery life.
The Battery error will be cleared automatically the next time the CPU Unit is turned ON after
replacing the Battery.

Using Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units
This section describes the Analog Input Unit, Analog Output Unit, Temperature Sensor
Units, CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, and Expansion I/O Units.
8-1 Analog Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-1-4 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-2 Analog Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-2-4 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8
8-3 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8-4 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
8-5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8-5-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8-5-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
8-5-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
8-5-4 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94

8-1 Analog Input Units
8-1-1 Overview
Each CP1W-AD041/CP1W-AD042 Analog Input Unit provides four analog inputs.

• The analog input signal ranges are 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to
20 mA.
The resolution of CP1W-AD041 is 1/6,000.
The resolution of CP1W-AD042 is 1/12,000.
The open-circuit detection function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
• The Analog Input Unit uses four input words and two output words.
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions
 CP1W-AD041/CP1W-AD042
IN CH
(2) Expansion I/O

connecting cable (1) Analog input terminals
(1)Analog Input Terminals

Connected to analog output devices.
• Input Terminal Arrangement

V IN1 Voltage input 1
IN CH
I IN1 Current input 1
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG I IN3 Current input 3
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
(2)Expansion I/O Connecting Cable

Connected to the CPU Unit or Expansion Unit expansion connector. The cable is attached to the
Analog Input Unit and cannot be removed.


Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operating errors.
(3)Expansion Connector
Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit to enable expansion.
8-1-3 Specifications
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Units are connected to a CP1E CPU Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-AD041
Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit CP1W-AD042
Analog Input Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP IN CH
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07 VIN1 COM1 I IN2 VIN3 COM3 I IN4 NC
4 analog inputs

Model CP1W-AD041 CP1W-AD042
Item Voltage input Current input Voltage input Current input
Number of analog inputs 4 inputs (4 words allocated)
Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V, or 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V, 0 to 10 VDC,
or -10 to 10 V or -10 to 10 VDC
Max. rated input ±15 V ±30 mA ±15 V ±30 mA
8
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Overall 25°C 0.3% full scale 0.4% full scale 0.2% full scale 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 55°C 0.6% full scale 0.8% full scale 0.5% full scale 0.7% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: Full scale for -10 to 10 V:
F448 to 0BB8 hex E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: Full scale for other ranges:
0000 to 1770 hex 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Averaging function Supported (Set in output words n+1 and n+2.)
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Conversion time 2 ms/point (8 ms/all points) 1 ms/point (4 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog input terminals and internal circuits. No
isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 100 mA max.; 5 VDC: 100 mA max.;
24 VDC: 90 mA max. 24 VDC: 50 mA max.
 Analog Input Signal Ranges

Analog input data is digitally converted according to the input signal range as shown below.

When the input exceeds the specified range, the A/D conversion data will be fixed at either the
lower limit or upper limit.
-10 to 10 V Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the -10 to 10 V
Converted data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) range correspond to hexadecimal values F448 to
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (-3,000 to 3,000). The range of data that can
0BB8 (3000) be converted is F31C to 0CE4 hex (-3,300 to
3,300). A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−11 V −10 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
F448 (−3000)
F31C (−3300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the -10 to 10 V

Hexadecimal (Decimal)
range correspond to hexadecimal values E890 to
19C8 (6600) 1770 (-6,000 to 6,000). The entire data range is
1770 (6000) E638 to 19C8 hex (-6,600 to 6,600). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two's complement.
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10V 11V
E890 (−6000)
E638 (−6600)
0 to 10 V Inputs
Converted data
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 0 to 10 V range
Hexadecimal (Decimal) correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
189C (6300)
to 6,000). The range of data that can be converted
1770 (6000) is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FED4 (−300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 10 V

range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
3138 (12600) 2EE0 (0 to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8
2EE0 (12000) to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
expressed as a two's complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FDA8 (−600)

0 to 5 V Inputs
Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000) is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
−0.25V 0000 (0)

0V 5V 5.25 V
FED4 (−300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 5 V range

correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0
3138 (12600) to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8 to 3138
2EE0 (12000) hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
expressed as a two’s complement.
−0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5V 5.25 V
FDA8 (−600)
1 to 5 V Inputs
Converted data
189C (6300)
is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300).Voltage in the

1770 (6000)
range of 0.8 to 1 V is expressed as a two’s comple-

ment.
0000 (0)
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 0.8 V),
0.8 V
1V 5 V 5.2 V the open-circuit detection function is activated and
FED4 (−300) the data becomes 8,000.
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 1 to 5 V range

Hexadecimal (Decimal) correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0
3138 (12600) to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8 to 3138 8
2EE0 (12000)
hex (-600 to 12,600). Voltage in the range of 0.8 to
1 V is expressed as two's complement.
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 0.8 V),
0000 (0) 0.8 V the open-circuit detection function is activated and
1V 5 V 5.2 V the data becomes 8,000.
FDA8 (−600)
0 to 20 mA Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 0 to 20 mA
Converted data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
1770 (0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300)
1770 (6000) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A
negative current is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FED4 (−300)

Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 20 mA

2EE0 (12000) to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FDA8 (−600)
4 to 20 mA Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 4 to 20 mA
Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be con-
1770 (6000) verted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). Current
in the range of 3.2 to 4 mA is expressed as a two’s
complement.
0000 (0) 3.2 mA
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2 mA),
0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA the open-circuit detection function is activated and
FED4 (−300) the data becomes 8,000.
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 4 to 20mA

range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
2EE0 (12000)
to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). Current in the range
of 3.2 to 4 mA is expressed as two's complement.
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2
0000 (0) 3.2 mA mA), the open-circuit detection function is activated
0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
and the data becomes 8,000.
FDA8 (−600)
 Averaging Function
For analog inputs, the averaging function operates when the averaging bit is set to 1. The averaging
function outputs the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted
value.
Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
 Open-circuit Detection
The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the volt-
age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below
3.2 mA.
When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
The time for enabling or clearing the open-circuit detection function is the same as the time for con-
verting the data. If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared
automatically and the output returns to the normal range.

8-1-4 Flow of Operation
• Connect Analog Input Units.

1 Connect and wire Units.
• Wire to analog output devices.
• Write set data to output words (n+1, n+2).

2 Create a ladder program.
• Set use of inputs.
• Select input signals using range codes.
• Set use of averaging.
• Read A/D converted values from input words (m+1 to m+4).
• For current inputs, confirm that there is no open circuit.
 Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Values
CPU Unit Analog Input Unit
Ladder program
Word (n+1) Set data (inputs 1, 2)
Word (n+2) Set data (inputs 3, 4)
MOV
Word (m+1) Analog input 1 converted value
Word (m+2) Analog input 2 converted value Analog devices
• Temperature sensor
Word (m+3) Analog input 3 converted value • Pressure sensor
Writes the set data.
• Speed sensor

Reads the converted Word (m+4) Analog input 4 converted value
• Flow sensor
value.
• Voltage/current meter
“m” is the last input word and “n” is • Other devices
the last output word allocated to the
CPU Unit or previous Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Analog Input Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-AD041/AD042

8
Analog Input Unit
IN CH
IIN1 VIN2 COM2 IIN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
VIN1 COM1 IIN2 VIN3 COM3 IIN4 NC

2 Wire to analog output devices.

(1) Wiring internal circuits of the CPU Unit
V IN1
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN1
Analog input 1
Internal circuits
COM1(−)
510 kΩ
to to
V IN4
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN4
Analog input 4
COM4(−)
510 kΩ
AG
Analog ground
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog Input Unit
2-core shielded 2-core shielded

+ twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable
V IN + V IN
Analog Analog Analog
device with Analog
I IN device with I IN Input
voltage Input
current Unit
output − COM Unit − COM
output
FG FG

• Do not connect the shield when using shielded twisted-pair cables.
• When an input is not being used, short V IN and I IN to COM terminals.
• Separate wiring from power lines (AC power supply lines, high-voltage lines, etc.)
• When there is noise in the power supply line, install a noise filter on the input section and the
power supply.

Refer to the following information on open circuits when using voltage inputs.
A
Analog
output
device
B C
1
Analog
output
device
2

24 VDC
For example, if connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for
both devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied to the input for input device
1.
If a wiring disconnection occurs when voltage input is being used, the situation described below will
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each
input.
• If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at 8
points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted
line in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the

other connected device will be generated.
• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be pos-
sible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both
devices and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
This problem will not occur for current inputs even if the same power supply is used.

3 Create the ladder program.

(1) Allocating I/O Words
Four input words and two output words are allocated from the next words following the last
I/O words allocated to the CPU Unit or an existing Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Words (m+1) to (m+4)
Analog Input Unit
Words (n+1), (n+2)
(2) Writing Set Data

Write the settings for input use, averaging use, and range codes for words n+1 and n+2.
When the set data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog Input Unit, the A/D con-
version will be started.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd (n+1) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog inputs Analog input 2 Analog input 1

are not used, bits 15 in
words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd (n+2) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog inputs Analog input 4 Analog input 3

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
• Set Data
Range code Analog input range

00 −10 to 10 V
01 0 to 10 V
10 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
11 0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
Averaging
0 No
1 Yes
Input use
0 No
1 Yes
• The Analog Input Unit will not start converting analog input values until the set data has
been written.
The conversion data will be 0000 until the range code is written.
• Once the settings have been made, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the range code or other settings, turn the CPU Unit
OFF then ON again.
(3) Averaging
Set whether averaging is to be used for set data. When the averaging bit is set to 1, the
average (moving average) for the past eight inputs is output as conversion data.

(4) Reading Analog Input Conversion Values

The ladder program can be used to read the memory area words where the converted val-
ues are stored.
With word m as the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit or an already-connected
Expansion Unit, the A/D conversion data will be output to the following words m+1 to m+4.
(5) Startup Operation
After the power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before
the first conversion data is stored in the input words. Therefore, create a program as shown
below, so that the ladder can start to operate with valid conversion data in input words.
The analog input data will be 0000 until the first conversion data is stored in the input
words.
TIM0005 is started when the power is turned

Always ON Flag
P_On ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
TIM contact turns ON and the analog input 1 con-
version data stored in CIO 2 is transferred to
0005
D0.
#0002
T0005
MOV
2
D0
(6) Handling Unit Errors

• When an error occurs in an Analog Input Unit, the analog input conversion data
becomes 0000.

• Expansion Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436 for Units 1 to 3. The bits are
allocated from A436.00 in order starting with the Unit nearest the CPU Unit. CP1W-
AD041 is allocated two bits each. Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to
detect errors.

(7) Program Example

Destination
Analog input Input range Range code Averaging Set data
word
Input 1 0 to 10 V 01 Yes 1101 (D hex) n+1
Input 2 4 to 20 mA 10 Yes 1110 (E hex) n+1
Input 3 -10 to +10 V 00 No 1000 (8 hex) n+2
Input 4 Not used. −(00) − 0000 (0 hex) n+2
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#80ED
102 Writes set data E and D.
MOV
#8008
Always ON 103 Writes set data 0 and 8.
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
CMP
3
#8000
P_EQ
100.00 Analog input 2 open circuit alarm
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
Execution D100 Reads analog input 1 converted value.

T0005 condition
MOV
3
Execution D101 Reads analog input 2 converted value.

T0005 condition
MOV
4
D102 Reads analog input 3 converted value.

• Example: Scaling analog input values

When a 0 to 10V voltage is input to the analog input word (CIO 3) of CP1W-AD042 as 0 to 12,000,
convert the value into a value between 0 and 24,000 and output the result to D200.
24,000
Scaled
value
(0 to
(D200)
24,000)
0
0 (Data in CIO3) 12,000
(0V) (10V)
Data input to Analog Input Unit
(Unscaled: 0 to 12,000)
Data Memory Settings

Setting Address Data
Control word D100 #0800
Unscaled minimum value (0) D101 &0
Scaled minimum value (0) D102 &0
Unscaled maximum value (12,000) D103 &12,000
Scaled maximum value (24,000) D104 &24,000

Ladder Program
Always ON Flag
P_On
APR(069) Use APR instruction for scaling.
D100
3
D200
8
Descriptions of APR Instruction

APR
Y1
C C:Control word Scaled
data
S S:Source word
D D:Result word D
Scaled
result
Y0
X0 S X1
Input data
Unscaled data

C: Control word
Set for “Signed Integer Data (Binary)”.
Control word setting

#0800: Binary numeral (0000 1000 0000 0000)
The number of coordinates is 1 (m=1), so

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 set bit 0 to 7 to “0” (=m-1).
C 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Number of coordinates minus one (m+1),

00 to FF hex (1İmİ256)
Floating-point specification for S and D
0: Integer data
Data length specification for S and D
0: 16-bit signed binary data
1: 32-bit signed binary data
Signed data specification for S and D
1: Signed binary data

Control word C #0800
Unscaled minimum value (X0) C+1 X0
Scaled minimum value (Y0) C+2 Y0
Unscaled maximum value (Xm = X1) C+3 X1
Scaled maximum value (Ym = Y1) C+4 Y1
S: Source data
Specify the word address of the input data before scaling.
R: Result word
Specify the word address where the data will be output after scaling.

8-2 Analog Output Units
8-2-1 Overview
Each CP1W-DA021 Analog Output Unit provides two analog outputs.

Each CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042 Analog Output Unit provides four analog outputs.
• The analog output signal ranges are 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA.
The resolution of CP1W-DA021/DA041 is 1/6,000.
The resolution of CP1W-DA042 is 1/12,000.
• CP1W-DA021 uses two output words and CP1W-DA041/DA042 uses four output words.
 CP1W-DA021/CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042

OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC
(2) Expansion I/O

(1) Analog output terminals
connecting cable
(1)Analog Output Terminals

Connected to analog input devices.
• I/O Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-DA021 8
V OUT1 Voltage output 1
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC I OUT1 Current output 1
8-2-1 Overview
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC
COM1 Output common 1

I OUT2 Current output 2
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC

VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC

• I/O Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-DA041/DA042

OUT CH
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC I OUT3 Current output 3

Connected to the expansion connector on the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit. The cable is
provided with the Unit and cannot be removed.

Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
CP1W-DA021/DA041/DA042 Analog Output Units are connected to a CP1E CPU Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-DA021/DA041

Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit CP1W-DA042
Analog Output Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP OUT CH
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07 VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC
CP1W-DA021: 2 analog outputs


Model CP1W-DA021/CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA042

Item Voltage output Current output Voltage output Current output
Analog Number of analog CP1W-DA021: 4 outputs (4 words allocated)
output outputs 2 outputs (2 words allocated)
section CP1W-DA041:
4 outputs (4 words allocated)
Output signal range 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA
or -10 to 10 V or -10 to 10 V
External output 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max. 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max.
allowable load
resistance
External output 0.5 Ω max. − 0.5 Ω max. −
impedance
Overall 25°C 0.4% full scale 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 55°C 0.8% full scale 0.7% full scale
D/A conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: Full scale for -10 to 10 V:
F448 to 0BB8 hex E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: Full scale for other ranges:
0000 to 1770 hex 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Conversion time CP1W-DA021: 1 ms/point (4 ms/all points)

2 ms/point (4 ms/all points)
CP1W-DA041:
2 ms/point (8 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No
isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption CP1W-DA021: 5 VDC 40 mA max.; 5 VDC: 70 mA max.;
24 VDC 95 mA max. 24 VDC: 160 mA max.
CP1W-DA041: 5 VDC 80 mA max.;
24 VDC 124 mA max.
8
 Analog Output Signal Ranges
The output data is converted to analog according to the output signal range, as shown below.
When the output exceeds the specified range, the output signal will be fixed at either the lower
limit or upper limit.

-10 to 10 V
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (-3000 to 3000) correspond
to an analog voltage range of -10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two’s complement if it is a negative value.
11 V
10 V
8000 F31C F448

(-3300) (-3000) 0000 (0) Conversion
0BB8 0CE4 7FFF Data
0V
(3000) (3300) Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
−10 V
−11 V
When the resolution is 1/12,000, the hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (-6000 to 6000) correspond
to an analog voltage range of -10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two's complement if it is a negative value.
11 V
10 V
E638 E890
8000 (−6600) (−6000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 19C8 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6600)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an
analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -0.5 to 10.5 V.
10.5 V
10 V
FED4
8000 (−300) 0000 (0) Conversion
1770 189C 7FFF Data
0V
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
−0.5 V

When the resolution is 1/12,000, the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to
an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two's complement if it is a negative value.
10.5 V
10 V
FDA8
8000 (−600) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion
Data

8000 FED4 0V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(−300) (6000) (6300) (Decimal)
an analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
5.2 V
5V
8
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(−600) (12000) (12600)
0 to 20 mA
analog current range of 0 to 20 mA.
The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
0000 (0) Conversion

8000
Data
0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(6000) (6300) (Decimal)

an analog voltage range of 0 to 20 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

Conversion Data
0 mA 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
4 to 20 mA
analog current range of 4 to 20 mA.
The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion
Data
8000 FED4 0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(−300) (6000) (6300) (Decimal)
an analog voltage range of 4 to 20 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 mA 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(−600) (12000) (12600)
• Connect Analog Output Units.

1 Connect and wire Units.
• Wire to analog input devices.
• Write range code to output words

CP1W-DA021: Word n+1
CP1W-DA041/DA042: Words n+1, n+2
• Set use of outputs.
• Select output signals using range codes.
• Write D/A conversion values to output words
CP1W-DA021: Words n+1, n+2
CP1W-DA041/DA042: Words n+1 to n+4

 Writing Set Data and Writing D/A Conversion Data
CP1W-DA021
CPU Unit Analog Output Unit
Ladder program Word (n+1) Set data (outputs 1, 2)
MOV
Word (n+1) Analog output 1 conversion value
Word (n+2) Analog output 2 conversion value Analog devices
• Adjustment equipment
Writes the set data. • Servo Controller
Writes the conversion • Variable speed device
values. • Recorder
Where “n” is the last output word • Other
allocated to the CPU Unit, or
previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042
CPU Unit Analog Output Unit
Ladder program Word (n+1) Set data (outputs 1, 2)

Word (n+2) Set data (outputs 3, 4)
MOV
Word (n+2) Analog output 2 conversion value Analog devices
Writes the set data. • Servo Controller
Writes the conversion Word (n+4) Analog output 4 conversion value • Variable speed device
values. • Recorder
Where “n” is the last output word • Other
allocated to the CPU Unit, or

previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Analog Output Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-DA021/DA041
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-DA042
Analog Output Unit 8
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG

2 Wire to analog input devices.

The following diagram shows the internal circuit using CP1W-DA041/DA042 as an exam-
ple, which wires analog outputs 1 to 4. In the case of CP1W-DA021, analog outputs 1 to 2
can be used.
V OUT1
Analog output 1
I OUT1
Internal circuits
COM1 (−)
to to
V OUT4
I OUT4 Analog output 4
COM4 (−)
Analog ground NC
(2) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog Output Unit

twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable
V OUT + V OUT +
Analog Analog
Analog device Analog device
I OUT I OUT
output with output with
unit COM − voltage unit COM − current
input input
FG FG

power supply.
When external power is supplied (when setting the range code), or when there is a power inter-
ruption, a pulse-form analog output may be generated.
If this causes problems with operation, take countermeasures such as those suggested below.
(1) Countermeasure 1
• Turn ON the power supply for the CP1E CPU Unit first, confirm correct operation, and
then turn ON the power supply for the load.
• Turn OFF the power supply for the load before turning OFF the power supply for the
CP1E CPU Unit.
• Control the machine not only by analog output but also by other signals (additional
start/stop control signal for machine).


(1) Allocating Output Words
Four output words (n+1 to n+4) are allocated to the Analog Output Unit starting from the
next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit. For CP1W-DA021, two output words (n+1, n+2) are allocated.
CP1W-DA041/DA042
Analog Output Unit
Words n+1 to n+4
(2) Writing Set Data

Write the output use and the range code to words n+1 and n+2. For CP1W-DA021, only
word n+1 can be used. The D/A conversion will start when the set data is transferred from
the CPU Unit to the Analog Output Unit.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd n+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog outputs Analog output 2 Analog output 1

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Wd n+2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog outputs Analog output 4 Analog output 3

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
• Set Data
8
Range code Analog output range
000 −10 to 10 V

001 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 20 mA
100 4 to 20 mA
Output use
0 No
1 Yes
• The Analog Output Unit will not start converting analog output values until the set data
has been written.
• Before the range code is written, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for the 0 to 10V, -10 to 10V,
or 0 to 20 mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output for the 1 to 5V and 4 to 20 mA
ranges.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the range code, turn the CPU Unit OFF then ON
again.

(3) Writing Analog Output Conversion Values

The ladder program can be used to write conversion data to the output words.
When “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit, the output words will be n+1 to n+2 for CP1W-DA021 and n+1 to n+4
for CP1W-DA041/DA042.
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before the
first conversion data is output.
The following table shows the output status after the initial processing is completed.
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output range 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
-10 to +10 V
Before range code 0V 0mA
is written
After range code is 0V 1V 0mA 4mA
written
Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that when operation begins simulta-
neously with startup it will wait for valid set data.
TIM0005 is started when the power is turned

Always ON Flag
P_On
ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
TIM
contact turns ON and the data stored in D100
will be moved to CIO 102 as the conversion
0005 data for analog output 1.
#0002
T0005
MOV
D100
102

• When an error occurs at the Analog Output Unit, the analog output will be 0 V or 0 mA.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog
output is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other fatal
errors at the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436 for
units 1 to 3. The bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest
the CPU Unit. CP1W-DA041/DA042 is allocated two bits each and CP1W-DA021 is allo-
cated one bit each. Use these flags in the probgram when it is necessary to detect
errors.

(6) Program Example (CP1W-DA041/DA042)

Analog output Output range Range code Set data Destination word
Output 1 0 to 10 V 001 1001 (9 hex) n+1
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 1100 (C hex) n+1
Output 3 -10 to 10 V 000 1000 (8 hex) n+2
Output 4 Not used. −(000) 0000 (0 hex) n+2
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#80C9
102 Writes set data C and 9.
MOV
#8008 Writes set data 0 and 8.
Always ON Flag 103
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
D200
102 Writes analog output 1 conversion data.
Execution

T0005 condition
MOV
D201
Execution 103 Writes analog output 2 conversion data.

T0005 condition
MOV
D202
104 Writes analog output 3 conversion data.

• Example: Scaling analog output values

Convert a value between 200 and 500 in D300 into 2 to 5 V to output the voltage from the analog
output word (CIO 102) of CP1W-DA042.
Unscaled 500
data
(200 to
500) (D300) 㩷
200
3,000 (Data in CIO102) 12,000

(2V) (5V)
Value output to Analog Output Unit
(Scaled: 3,000 to 12,000)
Data memory settings

Control word D110 #0800
Unscaled minimum value (200) D111 &200
Scaled minimum value (3,000) D112 &3,000
Unscaled maximum value (500) D113 &500
Scaled maximum value (12,000) D114 &12,000
Ladder program
Always ON Flag
P_On
APR(069) Use APR instruction for scaling.
D110
D300
102
Refer to 8-1 Example: Scaling analog input values for the descriptions of APR instruction.

8-3 Analog I/O Units
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units
Overview
Each CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output.
• The analog input range can be set to 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20
mA. The inputs have a resolution of 1/6000. An open-circuit detection function is activated in the
ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
• The analog output range can be set to 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The
outputs have a resolution of 1/6000.
 CP1W-MAD11
(4) DIP switch

NC NC
(2) Expansion I/O connecting cable

(1) Analog I/O terminals
(1)Analog I/O Terminals 8

Connected to analog I/O devices.

• I/O Terminal Arrangements
V OUT Voltage output
I OUT Current output
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
I OUT NC NC V IN0 COM0 I IN1 AG
V OUT COM NC NC I IN0 V IN1 COM1
COM1 Input common 1
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.

Connected to the expansion connector of a CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
The cable is provided with the Analog I/O Unit and cannot be removed.


Used for connecting Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units.
(4)DIP Switch
Used to enable or disable averaging.
Pin 1: Average processing for analog input 0
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
Pin 2: Average processing for analog input 1
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
Specifications
CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP1E CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-MAD11
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Analog I/O Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 NC NC
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07
1 analog output 2 analog inputs

Model CP1W-MAD11
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Number of analog inputs 2 inputs (2 words allocated)
Input Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section or -10 to 10 V
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/6000 (full scale)
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Averaging function Supported (Settable for individual inputs via DIP switch)
Open-circuit detection func- Supported
tion
Analog Number of outputs 1 output (1 word allocated)
Output Output signal range 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section or -10 to 10 VDC
Allowable external output 1 kΩ min. 600 Ω max.
load resistance
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. −

Overall 25°C 0.4% full scale
accuracy 0 to 55°C 0.8% full scale
Set data (D/A conversion) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Conversion time 2 ms/point (6 ms/all points)
8
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal cir-
cuits.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.

Current consumption 5 VDC: 83 mA max., 24 VDC: 110 mA max.
 Analog I/O Signal Ranges

Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range as shown below.
When the input/output exceeds the specified range, the AD/DA converted data will be fixed at
either the lower limit or upper limit.

Analog Input Signal Ranges

-10 to 10 V
Voltages in the -10 to 10 V range corre-
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) spond to hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8
(-3,000 to 3,000). The range of data that
0CE4 (3300) can be converted is F31C to 0CE4 hex (-
0BB8 (3000) 3,300 to 3,300). A negative voltage is
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
F448 (−3000)
F31C (−3300)
0 to 10 V
Converted Data Voltages in the 0 to 10 V range correspond
Hexadecimal (Decimal) to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
6,000). The range of data that can be con-
189C (6300) verted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300).
1770 (6000)
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FED4 (−300)
0 to 5 V
Voltages in the 0 to 5 V range correspond to
Converted Data
hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
1770 (6000)
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5 V 5.25 V
FED4 (−300)

1 to 5 V
Voltages in the 1 to 5 V range correspond to
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
1770 (6000)
Voltage in the range of 0.8 to 1 V is
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than
0.8 V), the open-circuit detection function is
0000 (0) 0.8 V activated and the data becomes 8,000.
1V 5 V 5.2 V
FED4 (−300)
0 to 20 mA
Currents in the 0 to 20 mA range corre-
Converted Data
spond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
1770 (6000) 6,300). A negative current is expressed as a
two’s complement.
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FED4 (−300)

4 to 20 mA
Currents in the 4 to 20 mA range corre-
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) spond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
1770 (6000) 6,300). Current in the range of 3.2 to 4 mA
is expressed as a two’s complement. If an
input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2
mA), the open-circuit detection function is
8
activated and the data becomes 8,000.
0000 (0) 3.2 mA
0 mA

4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FED4 (−300)

Analog Output Signal Ranges

-10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (-3000 to 3000) correspond to an analog voltage range of
-10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11V.
11 V
10 V
F31C F448
8000 (−3300) (−3000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 0BB8 0CE4 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(3000) (3300)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
10.5 V
10 V
FED4
8000 (−300) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FED4 0 V 1770 189C 7FFF
(−300) (6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)

0 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog current range of 0 to 20 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

1770 189C Conversion Data
0 mA 7FFF
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
4 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog current range of 4 to 20 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion Data

8000 FED4 0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF
 Averaging Function for Analog Inputs

The averaging function can be enabled for inputs using the DIP switch. The averaging function out-
puts the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted value. 8
Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
 Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs 8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units
age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below
3.2 mA.
When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
verting the data.
If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared automatically and
the output returns to the normal range.

Flow of Operation
• Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Unit.
• Set analog inputs as voltage or current inputs and set the aver-
aging function.
• Connect analog I/O devices.

2 Wire the analog I/O.
• Write the range code.

• Analog inputs: Read converted values.
• Analog output: Write set data.
 Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Values

CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
Ladder program
Word (n+1) Set data
Analog input 0
Word (m+1) converted value
MOV
Word (m+2) Analog input 1
• Writes the set data.
• Reads the converted
converted value
values.
Analog devices
“m” is the last input word and “n” is the last • Temperature sensor
output word allocated to the CPU Unit or • Pressure sensor
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. • Speed sensor
• Flow sensor
• Other
 Writing D/A Conversion Data

CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
Ladder program (*)

Analog output
Word (n+1)
conversion value
MOV
Writes the conversion

values.
Analog devices
“n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU • Servo Controller
Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O • Variable speed device
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Word (n+1) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.

1 Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-MAD11
CP1E CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
NC NC
• Setting the Averaging Function

DIP switch pins 1 and 2 are used to set the averaging function. When averaging is enabled, a
moving average of the last eight input values is output as the converted value. The averaging
function can be set separately for analog inputs 0 and 1.
DIP switch pin Function Setting Default
1 Averaging Analog input 0 OFF
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled
2 Analog input 1 OFF
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled

2 Wire to analog I/O devices.
• Analog Inputs • Analog Outputs
Input 0 Output
510 kΩ
V IN0 V OUT
I IN0
250 Ω
COM0 (−) 8
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
COM (−)
510 kΩ
Input 1
V IN1

510 kΩ I OUT
I IN1
250 Ω
COM1 (−)
510 kΩ NC
AG
NC
Analog ground Analog ground
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog I/O Unit

Analog + V IN Analog + V IN
device Analog device Analog
I IN I IN
with Input with Input
voltage − COM Unit current − COM Unit
output output
FG FG

(3) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog I/O Unit

V OUT + Analog V OUT + Analog
I OUT I OUT
Output with Output with
Unit COM − voltage Unit COM − current
input input
FG FG

power supply terminals.
A
Analog
output
device 1
B C
Internal
circuits
Analog
output
device 2
24 VDC
Example: If connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied to the input for input device 1.
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.

• If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at
points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line
in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other
connected device will be generated.
• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be possible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both devices
and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
CP1E CPU Unit.

Two input words and one output word are allocated to the Analog I/O Unit starting from the
next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog I/O Unit
Word m+1
Word m+2
8
32 inputs

16 outputs
Word n+1
(2) Writing the Set Data

Write the set data to word n+1. A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set data is trans-
ferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. There are five range codes, 000 to 100,
that combine the analog input 0 and 1 and analog output ranges, as shown below.
Range code Analog input 0 range Analog input 1 range Analog output range
000 -10 to 10 V -10 to 10 V -10 to 10 V
001 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
100 − − 4 to 20 mA

15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word n+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

output input 1 input 0
Example: The following instructions set analog input 0 to 4 to 20 mA, analog input 1 to 0 to 10 V,
and the analog output to -10 to 10 V.
First Cycle Flag
A200.11
MOV Analog input 0: 4 to 20 mA
#800A Analog input 1: 0 to 10 V
Analog output: -10 to 10 V
n+1
• The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the range code has
been written. Inputs will be 0000, and 0 V or 0 mA will be output.
• After the range code has been set, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for the 0 to 10V, -10 to
10V, or 0 to 20mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output for the 1 to 5V and 4 to 20mA
ranges until a convertible value has been written to the output word.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to change the setting while power is
being supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the I/O range, turn the CPU Unit OFF then
ON again.
(3) Reading Analog Input Converted Values

The ladder program can be used to read the memory area words where the converted val-
ues are stored.
Values are output to the next two words (m + 1, m + 2) following the last input word (m) allo-
cated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
(4) Writing Analog Output Converted Values

The ladder program can be used to write data to the memory area where the set value is
stored.
The output word will be “n+1”, where “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit or
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.

After the power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before
the first conversion data is stored in the input words. Therefore, create a program as shown
below, so that when operation begins simultaneously with startup it will wait for valid con-
version data.
Analog input data will be 0000 until initial processing is completed. Analog output data will
be 0 V or 0 mA until the range code has been written. After the range code has been writ-
ten, the analog output data will be 0 V or 0 mA if the range is 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, or 0 to
20 mA, or it will be 1 V or 4 mA if the range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
Always ON Flag
P_On TIM0005 is started when the power is turned
TIM ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
0005 contact turns ON and the converted data from
analog input 0 that is stored in CIO 2 will be
#0002
transferred to D0.
T0005
MOV
2
D0


• When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be 0000 and 0 V or 0
mA will be output as the analog output.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog
output is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other fatal
errors at the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436. The
bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest the CPU Unit. Use
these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect errors.
(7) Programming Example

Analog input 0: 0 to 10 V
Analog input 1: 4 to 20 mA
Analog output : 0 to 10 V
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#8051
102 Writes the range code (8051) to the Unit.
Always ON Flag
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002

Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
D0 Reads analog input 0’s converted value.
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
3 8
D1 Reads analog input 1’s converted value.
Execution

T0005
condition
MOV
D10
102 The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output set value.
T0005 condition
CMP
3
#8000
P_EQ
100.00 Open-circuit alarm

8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units
Overview
Each CP1W-MAD42 Analog I/O Unit provides 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs.
Each CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Unit provides 4 analog inputs and 4 analog outputs.
• The analog input range can be set to 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, −10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20
mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The inputs have a resolution of 1/12000.
An open-circuit detection function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 VDC and 4 to 20 mA.
• The analog output range can be set to 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, −10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20 mA. The outputs have a resolution of 1/12000.
 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44
(1) Analog Input terminals
(3) Expansion I/O connecting cable (2) Analog Output terminals
(1)Analog Input Terminals

Connected to analog output devices.
• Input Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD42/MAD44
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
(2)Analog Output Terminals
Connected to analog input devices.

• Output Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD42

• Output Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD44


Connected to the expansion connector of a CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
The cable is provided with the Analog I/O Unit and cannot be removed.

(4)Expansion Connector 8
Units
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O
Specifications
CP1W-MAD42/MAD44 Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP1E CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-MAD42/MAD44
CP1E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Analog I/O Unit
4 analog inputs
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
CP1W-MAD42: 2 analog outputs

CP1W-MAD44: 4 analog outputs

Model CP1W-MAD042/CP1W-MAD044
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Number of inputs 4 inputs (4 words allocated)
Input Input signal range 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section 0 to 10 VDC, or −10 to 10 VDC
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for −10 to 10 V: E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Averaging function Supported
Open-circuit detection func- Supported
tion
Analog Number of outputs CP1W-MAD42: 2 outputs (2 words allocated)
Output CP1W-MAD44: 4 outputs (4 words allocated)
Section
Output signal range 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
−10 to 10 VDC
Allowable external output 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max.
load resistance
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max.
Overall 25°C 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 55°C 0.7% full scale
Set data (D/A conversion) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for −10 to 10 V: E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Conversion time CP1W-MAD42: 1 ms/point (6 ms/all points)
CP1W-MAD44: 1 ms/point (8 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption CP1W-MAD42: 5 VDC: 120 mA max., 24 VDC: 120 mA max.
CP1W-MAD44: 5 VDC: 120 mA max., 24 VDC: 170 mA max.
 Analog I/O Signal Ranges

Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range as shown below.
When the input/output exceeds the specified range, the AD/DA converted data will be fixed at
either the lower limit or upper limit.

Analog Input Signal Ranges

−10 to 10 V
The −10 to 10 V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (−6000 to 6000). The
entire data range is E638 to 19C8 (−6600 to 6600).
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
Converted Data
19C8 (6600)
1770 (6000)
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
E890 (−6000)
E638 (−6600)
0 to 10 V
The 0 to 10 V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000). The entire
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.

Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V 8
FDA8 (−600)
Units
0 to 5 V
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5 V 5.25 V
FDA8 (−600)

1 to 5 V
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 0.8 V, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 0.8 V

1V 5 V 5.2 V
FDA8 (−600)
0 to 20 mA
The 0 to 20 mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000). The entire
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). A negative current is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FDA8 (−600)
4 to 20 mA
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 3.2 mA, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 3.2 mA

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FDA8 (−600)

Analog Output Signal Ranges

−10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (−6000 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of −10
to 10 V. The entire output range is −11 to 11 V. Specify a negative voltage as a two’s complement.
11 V
10 V
E638 E890
8000 (−6600) (−6000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 19C8 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6600)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to
10 V. The entire output range is −0.5 to 10.5 V. Specify a negative voltage as a two’s complement.
10.5 V
10 V

FDA8
8000 (−600) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 1 to 8
5 V. The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
Units
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 V 2EE0 3138 7FFF

0 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog current range of 0 to
20 mA. The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

2EE0 3138 Conversion Data
0 mA 7FFF
(12000) (12600) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
4 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog current range of 4 to
20 mA. The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
7FFF Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 mA 2EE0 3138
 Averaging Function for Analog Inputs

For analog inputs, the averaging function operates when the averaging bit is set to 1. The averaging
function outputs the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted
value. If there is only a slight variation in inputs, it is handled by the averaging function as a smooth
input.
The averaging function stores the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the
converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
 Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs

age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2
mA. When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.

Flow of Operation
• Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Unit.
• Set analog inputs as voltage or current inputs and set the aver-
aging function.
• Connect analog I/O devices.

2 Wire the analog I/O.
• Write the range code.

• Analog inputs: Read converted values.
• Analog output: Write set data.
 Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Data

CPU Unit CP1W-MAD42
Set data (input 1, 2
Word (n+1) and output 1)
Ladder program Set data (input 3, 4
Word (n+2)
and output 2)
Analog input 1
Word (m+1)
MOV converted value
Analog input 2
• Writes the set data. Word (m+2)
converted value
Analog input 3

values.
Word (m+3)
converted value
Word (m+4)
Analog input 4
converted value
Analog devices
• Flow sensor
8
• Other
Units
CPU Unit CP1W-MAD44
Set data
Word (n+1) (input 1, 2)
Set data
Word (n+2) (input 3, 4)
Ladder program
Set data
Word (n+3) (output 1, 2)
Set data
MOV Word (n+4) (output 3, 4)
• Writes the set data. Analog input 1
values. Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Word (m+3)
converted value
Word (m+4)
Analog input 4
converted value
Analog devices
• Flow sensor
• Other

 Writing D/A Conversion Data

CPU Unit CP1W-MAD42
Ladder program (*)

Analog output 1
Word (n+1) conversion value
Analog output 2
Word (n+2)
MOV conversion value
Writes the conversion

values.
Analog devices
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Words (n+1, n+2) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.
CPU Unit CP1W-MAD44
Ladder program (*)

Word (n+1)
Analog output 1
conversion value
Word (n+2) Analog output 2
MOV conversion value
Word (n+3) Analog output 3
Writes the conversion conversion value
values.
Word (n+4)
Analog output 4
conversion value
Analog devices
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Words (n+1 to n+4) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.
1 Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-MAD42/44
CP1E CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit

2 Wire to analog I/O devices.

Analog Inputs
V IN1
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN1 Analog input 1
COM1 (−)
Internal circuits
510 kΩ
to to
V IN4
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN4 Analog input 4
COM4 (−)
510 kΩ
AG
Analog ground
Analog Outputs (CP1W-MAD42) Analog Outputs (CP1W-MAD44)
V OUT1 V OUT1
Analog Analog
COM1 (−) COM1 (−)
output 1 output 1
I OUT1 I OUT1
Internal circuits
Internal circuits

to to to to
V OUT2 V OUT4
Analog Analog
COM2 (−) COM4 (−)
output 2 output 4
I OUT2 I OUT4
NC NC
8
NC NC
Analog ground Analog ground
Units
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog I/O Unit

I IN I IN
with Input with Input
voltage − COM Unit current − COM Unit
output output
FG FG
(3) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog I/O Unit

I OUT I OUT
Output with Output with
input input
FG FG


power supply terminals.
A
Analog
output
device 1
B C
Internal
circuits
Analog
output
device 2
24 VDC
Example: If connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied to the input for input device 1.
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.
• If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at
points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line
in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other
connected device will be generated.
• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be possible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both devices
and open-circuit detection will not be possible.

CP1E CPU Unit.

Four input words and two output words are allocated to the CP1W-MAD42, starting from
the next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit
or Expansion I/O Unit.
Four input words and four output words are allocated to the CP1W-MAD44, starting from
the next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit
or Expansion I/O Unit.

CP1W-MAD42 CP1W-MAD44
Word m+1 Word m+1
Word m+2 Word m+2
Word m+3 Word m+3
Word m+4 Word m+4
Word n+1 Word n+1

Word n+2 Word n+2
Word n+3
8
Word n+4
(2) Writing the Range Code
Units
(a) CP1W-MAD42
Write the set data to words (n+1 to n+2). A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set
data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. Setting contents are
shown as the following table.
Word (n+1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 Analog output 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 1
Word (n+2) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 Analog output 2 Analog input 4 Analog input 3

(b) CP1W-MAD44
Write the set data to words (n+1 to n+4). A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set
data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. Setting contents are
shown as the following table.
Word (n+1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog input 2 Analog input 1
Word (n+2) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog input 4 Analog input 3
Word (n+3) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog output 2 Analog output 1
Word (n+4) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog output 4 Analog output 3
Even if analog inputs are not used, bit 15 in word (n+1) and (n+2) must be set to 1.
• Set Data of Analog Inputs
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value Enable Average AD Range Code Enable Average AD Range Code
Enable Bit Average Bit AD Range Code

0 : Disable channel 0 : Disable 00 : −10 to 10V
1 : Enable channel 1 : Enable 01 : 0 to 10V
10 : 1 to 5V (4 to 20mA)
11 : 0 to 5V (0 to 20mA)
Range Code Analog input range

00 −10 to 10 V
01 0 to 10 V
10 1 to 5 V (4 to 20 mA)
11 0 to 5 V (0 to 20 mA)
• Set Data of Analog Outputs
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value Enable DA Range Enable DA Range
Enable Bit DA Range

0 : Disable channel 000 : -10 to 10
1 : Enable channel 001 : 0 to 10V
010 : 1 to 5V
011 : 0 to 20m
100 : 4 to 20m
Range Code Analog output range

000 −10 to 10 V
001 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 20 mA
100 4 to 20 mA
• The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the set data has been
written.
• Before range code is written, 0 V or 0 mA will be output in the 0 to 10 V, −10 to +10 V,
and 0 to 20 mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output in the 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA
ranges.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the code range, turn the CPU Unit OFF then ON
again.

(3) Averaging
Set whether averaging is to be used for set data. When the averaging bit is set to 1, the
average (moving average) for the past eight inputs is output as conversion data.
(4) Reading Analog Input Converted Values
Read the conversion value storage area with the ladder program. With word m as the last
input word allocated to the CPU Unit or an already-connected Expansion Unit, the A/D con-
version data will be output to the following words m+1 to m+4.
(5) Writing Analog Output Converted Values
The ladder program can be used to write conversion data to the output words. The output
word start from “n+1” where “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or previ-
ous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50ms before the
first conversion data is output.
Analog input data will be 0000 until the first conversion data is stored in the input words.
The following table shows the output status after the initial processing is completed.
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output range 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
-10 to +10 V
Before range code 0V 0mA
is written
After range code is 0V 1V 0mA 4mA
written

Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that the ladder can start to operate with
valid conversion data in input words.
Always ON Flag
P_On TIM0005 is started when the power is turned
TIM ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
0005 contact turns ON and the converted data from
analog input 0 that is stored in CIO 2 will be
#0002
transferred to D0.
8
T0005
MOV
Units
2
D0

When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be 0000 and 0 V or 0 mA
will be output as the analog output.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog out-
put is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other errors at the
CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
CP1E CP1W-MAD42 CP1W-MAD44

Input word CIO 0 CIO 2 CIO 6
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3 CIO 7
CIO 4 CIO 8
CIO 5 CIO 9
CIO 104
CIO 105
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102 CIO 106
addresses CIO 101 CIO 103 CIO 107

This programming example uses these ranges:

(a) CP1W-MAD42
Analog Input Range Averaging Set data Destination
input range code word
Input 2 0 to 10 V 01 Yes 1101 (D hex) n+1
Input 3 0 to 5 V 11 Yes 1111 (F hex) n+2
Input 4 -10 to 10 V 00 Yes 1100 (C hex) n+2
Output 1 -10 to 10 V 000 − 1000 (8 hex) n+1
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 − 1100 (C hex) n+2
(a) CP1W-MAD44
Analog Input Range Averaging Set data Destination
input range code word
Input 2 0 to 10 V 01 No 1001 (9 hex) n+1
Input 3 0 to 5 V 11 Yes 1111 (F hex) n+2
Input 4 -10 to 10 V 00 Yes 1100 (C hex) n+2
Output 1 -10 to 10 V 000 − 1000 (8 hex) n+3
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 − 1100 (C hex) n+3
Output 3 0 to 10 V 001 − 1001 (9 hex) n+4
Output 4 Not use − − 0000 (0 hex) n+4
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#88DE
102 ← Writes the range code of CP1W-MAD42 to the Unit.
A200.11
MOV
#8CCF
103
A200.11
MOV
#809E
104 ← Writes the range code of CP1W-MAD44 to the Unit.
A200.11
MOV
#80CF
105
A200.11
MOV
#80C8
106
A200.11
MOV
#8009
107

Always ON Flag
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
D0 ← Reads analog input 1’s of CP1W-MAD42 converted value.
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
3
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
6
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
7
Execution
T0005
condition
MOV

D10
102 ← The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output conversion value.
T0005 condition
CMP
2 Open-circuit detection (4 to 20 mA)
#8000
(P_EQ)
8
Units
Execution
T0005
condition
MOV
D12
104 ← The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output conversion value.
T0005 condition
CMP
6 Open-circuit detection (4 to 20 mA)
#8000
(P_EQ)

8-4 Temperature Sensor Units
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units
Overview
CP1W-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units each provide up to four input points, and CP1W-
TS001/TS101 Temperature Sensor Units each provide up to two input points. The inputs can be from
thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers.
CP1W-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units are each allocated four input words.
 Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS001/002/101/102
(2) DIP Switch (3) Rotary Switch
(5) Expansion Connector
(4) Expansion I/O

Connecting Cable (1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals
(1)Temperature Sensor Input Terminals

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples or platinum resistance thermome-
ters.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the number of decimal places used.
(3)Rotary Switch
Used to set the temperature input range. Make the setting according to the specifications of the
temperature sensors that are connected.

Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1E CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion
I/O Unit. The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.


Specifications
A CP1W-TS01/TS02 Temperature Sensor Unit can be connected to a CP1E CPU Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS 01/TS 02

Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Temperature Sensor Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
Thermocouples or
platinum resistance
thermometers
Temperature inputs
Model CP1W-TS001 CP1W-TS002 CP1W-TS101 CP1W-TS102

Temperature sen- Thermocouples Platinum resistance thermometer
sors Switchable between K and J, but same type Switchable between Pt100 and JPt100, but
must be used for all inputs. same type must be used for all inputs.

Number of inputs 2 4 2 4
Allocated input 2 4 2 4
words
Accuracy (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value or (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value or
±2°C) ±1 digit max. * ±1°C) ±1 digit max.
Conversion time 250 ms for 2 or 4 input points
Converted tempera- 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
ture data
Isolation Photocouplers between all temperature input signals
Current consump- 5 VDC: 40 mA max., 5 VDC: 54 mA max., 8
tion 24 VDC: 59 mA max. 24 VDC: 73 mA max.
* Accuracy for a K-type sensor at -100°C or less is ±4°C ±1 digit max.
Units
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor
Flow of Operation
• Connect the Temperature Sensor Units to the CPU Unit.
1 Connect the Temperature
Sensor Units.
• Set the temperature unit, 2-decimal-place mode if required, and

2 Set the temperature ranges.
set the temperature input range.
• Connect temperature sensors.

3 Connect the temperature
sensors.
• Read temperature data stored in the input words.

4 Operation in the ladder
program.

1 Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS001/101

CP1E CPU Unit
COM 01 030 5 07 09 11 COM 01 03

NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
NC COM COM C OM 03C OM 06 COM 050 7
2 Set temperature ranges.

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch and rotary switch, set the temperature unit, the
number of decimal places, and the temperature input range.

Do not touch the DIP switch or rotary switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may
cause operating errors.

Always turn OFF the power supply before setting the temperature range.
DIP Switch Rotary Switch

Used to set the temperature Used to set the
unit and the number of temperature input range.
decimal places used.
Temperature input terminals
(1) DIP Switch Settings

The DIP switch is used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the number of decimal
places.
SW Setting
ON
1 Temperature unit OFF °C
ON °F
1 2
2 Number of deci- OFF Normal (0 or 1 digit after the decimal
mal places* point, depending on the input range)
ON 2-decimal-place Mode
* For details on 2-decimal-place Mode, refer to Two-decimal-place Mode in Function Descriptions.

(2) Rotary Switch Setting
Caution
Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor
connected to the Unit.
Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range
does not match the sensor.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for
which temperature ranges are given in the following table.
The rotary switch is used to set the temperature range.

CP1W-TS001/TS002 CP1W-TS101/TS102
Set-
ting Input Input
Range (°C) Range (°F) Range (°C) Range (°F)
type type
0 K -200 to 1,300 -300 to 2,300 Pt100 -200.0 to -300.0 to
650.0 1,200.0
1 0.0 to 500.0 0.0 to 900.0 JPt100 -200.0 to -300.0 to
650.0 1,200.0
2 J -100 to 850 -100 to 1,500 − Cannot be set.
3 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 750.0 −

4 to F − Cannot be set. −
3 Connect Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
(a) CP1W-TS001
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS001, but both
thermocouples must be the same type and the same input range.
8
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC
+ +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC NC NC
− −
Units
Temperature input 0
Cold junction compensator
Temperature input 1

(b) CP1W-TS002
Up to four K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS002, but all four
thermocouples must be the same type and the same input range.
Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 NC

+ + + +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC Input 2 Input 3
− − − −
Temperature input 0
Cold junction Temperature input 2
compensator
Temperature input 1 Temperature input 3

When connecting a thermocouple input, observe the following precautions:
• Do not remove the cold junction compensator attached at the time of delivery. If the cold junc-
tion compensator is removed, the Unit will not be able to measure temperatures correctly.
• Each of the input circuits is calibrated with the cold junction compensator attached to the Unit.
If the Unit is used with the cold junction compensator from other Units, the Unit will not be able
to measure temperatures correctly.
• Do not touch the cold junction compensator. Doing so may result in incorrect temperature
measurement.
(2) Platinum Resistance Thermometers

(a) CP1W-TS101
One or two Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the
CP1W-TS101, but both of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same
input range must be used for each.
Input 0 Input 1 Input 1 NC NC NC NC

A A B
B B B
Pt Pt

(b) CP1W-TS102
Up to four Pt100 or JPt100 platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the
CP1W-TS102, but all four of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same
input range must be used for each.
Input 0 Input 1 Input 1 NC Input 2 Input 3 Input 3

A A B A A B
B B B B B B
Pt Pt Pt Pt
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

input 0 input 1 input 2 input 3

Do not connect anything to terminals not used for inputs.

(1) Words Allocation
Temperature Sensor Units are allocated words in the same way as other CP-series Expan-
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, i.e., in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
allocated the next input words following the input words of the CPU Unit or previous Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Two input words are allocated to the 2-input CP1W-TS001
or CP1W-TS101 and four input words are allocated to the 4-input CP1W-TS002 or CP1W-
TS102. No output words are allocated.
• Example 1 (E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit)
8
CPU Unit CP1W-TS001/101
Temperature Sensor Unit
Units
Input word CIO 0 CIO 2
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3
Output word CIO 100

addresses None
CIO 101
• Example 2 (E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit)
CPU Unit CP1W-TS002/102

CIO 4
CIO 5
Output word CIO 100
addresses None
CIO 101

(2) Reading Temperature Data

The temperature data will be stored in the input words allocated to the Temperature Sensor
Unit in 4-digit hexadecimal.
CP1W-TS002/TS102 CP1W-TS001/TS101
m+1 Converted temperature m+1 Converted temperature

data from input 0 data from input 0
m+2 Converted temperature m+2 Converted temperature
data from input 1 data from input 1
m+3 Converted temperature
data from input 2
m+4 Converted temperature
data from input 3
“m” is the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit
connected immediately before the Temperature Sensor Unit.
• If the converted value is a negative value, it will be stored as its two’s complements.
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored as binary
without the decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Input Data conversion examples
Unit: 1°C K, J 850°C→0352 hex
-200°C→FF38 hex
Unit: 0.1°C Pt, JPt, K, J ×10 500.0°C→5000→1388 hex
-20.0°C→-200→FF38 hex
-200.0°C→-2000→F830 hex
• If the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20°C or ±20°F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the con-
verted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
• The open-circuit detection function will be automatically cleared and normal input tem-
perature conversion will begin automatically when the input temperature returns to the
convertible range.


After power is turned ON, approximately 1 s is required for the first conversion data to be
stored in the input word. During that period, the data will be 7FFE. Therefore, create a pro-
gram as shown below, so that when operation begins simultaneously with startup it will wait
for valid conversion data.
Always ON
P_On
CMP
2 Temperature input data
#7FFE
output word
P_EQ
Initialization
Completed Flag
W0.00

• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436. The
bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest the CPU Unit.
CP1W-TS002 and CP1W-TS102 Temperature Sensor Units are allocated two bits each.
Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect Expansion Unit/Expansion
I/O Unit errors.
• When an error occurs, the Temperature Sensor Unit data becomes 7FFF hex (the same
as for an open-circuit detection). With an open-circuit detection, it is not reflected in word
A436.

(5) Programming Example (E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Unit)
(a) The following programming example shows how to convert the input data from 2
temperature sensor inputs to BCD and store the result in D0 and D1.
CP1W-TS001/101
CP1E CPU Unit
Temperature Sensor Unit Temperature unit 0 (°C)
CIO 0 CIO 2 Number of decimal places 0 (normal)
Inputs
CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range setting 1 (K: 0.0 to 500.0°C)
Input 0 CIO 2
Outputs CIO 100 Input 1 CIO 3
None
8
CIO 101
Units

Always ON
P_On
CMP Detects completion of input 0 initialization.
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized
Always ON
P_On
3
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.01 ON when input 1 has been initialized
W0.00 Execution condition
CMP Detects an open-circuit alarm or Unit
2 error by checking converted temperature
data for the error code 7FFF.
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.02 ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error has been detected for input 0.
CMP Checks to see if the temperature data
2 in CIO 2 has exceeded 500.0°C (1388
hex without decimal point).
#1388
P_GT
W0.03 ON for an input 0 temperature error
P_LT
BCD Converts the temperature data for
2 input 0 to BCD and stores the result in
D0.
D0
W0.01 Execution condition
3 error by checking whether the error
code 7FFF has been output.
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.04 ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error has been detected for input 1.
CMP Checks to see if the temperature data
3 in CIO 3 has exceeded 500.0°C (1388
hex without decimal point).
#1388
P_GT
W0.05 ON for an input 1 temperature error
P_LT
BCD Converts the temperature data for
input 1 to BCD and stores the result in
3
D1.
D1

(b) The following programming example shows how to convert the data for temper-
ature input 0 to BCD and store the result in D0 and D1. “#0001” is stored in D1
when the input data is a negative value. The following system configuration is
used.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-TS001/101 Temperature unit set- 0(°C)
ting
Inputs CIO 0 CIO 2
CIO 1 CIO 3
Two-decimal-place 0 (normal)
mode
Input range setting 1 (Pt100: -200.0 to
Outputs CIO 100 650.0°C)
CIO 101 None
Input 0 CIO 2
(6) Programming with BCD Instruction
Always ON
P_On
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
Execution W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized
W0.00 condition
error by checking whether the error code
2 7FFF has been output

#7FFF
P_EQ ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
W0.01 error has been detected for input 0.
P_EQ 2.15
BCD Stores positive BCD data in D0.
2
D0
MOV Stores #0000 in D1.

#0000
D1
2.15
-(410) When input 0 converted value is negative
(#0000 minus two’s complement = actual
#0000
2
value)
8
D0
Stores negative BCD data in D0.
Units
BCD
D0
D0
MOV Stores #0001 in D1 to indicate a

negative number.
#0001
D1

(7) Programming with SCL2 Instruction
Always ON
P_On
CMP Detects completion of input 0
initialization.
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
Execution W0.00 ON when initialization complete.
W0.00 condition
2 error by checking whether the error code
7FFF has been output
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.01 ON when an open-circuit alarm has
been detected.
P_EQ
SCL2
2
D10 Parameter settings for data conversion:
D0
P_CY
MOV When the converted value is non-
#0000 negative, stores #0000 in D1.
D1
P_CY
MOV When the converted value is
#0001 negative, stores #0001 in D1.
D1
• Operation
Binary to BCD conversion

CIO 2 163 162 161 160
CY
D1 D0 (when using SCL2 instruction)
0 0 0 1/0 103 102 101 100 1/0
1: Negative, 0: Non-negative
0: If data non-negative, “0000” stored in D1.
1: If data negative, “0001” stored in D1.
Function Descriptions
 Two-decimal-place Mode
If pin 2 on the DIP switch is turned ON, values are stored to two decimal places. In this case, tem-
perature data is stored as 6-digit signed hexadecimal (binary) data with 4 digits in the integer portion
and 2 digits after the decimal point. The actual data stored in memory is 100 times the actual value,
i.e., the decimal point is not indicated. Methods for handling this data are described in this section.
When set to store values to two decimal places, temperature data as far as two digits after the
decimal point is converted to 6-digit binary data, but the actual resolution is not 0.01°C (°F). For
this reason, there may be skipping and inaccuracies in the first digit after the decimal point 0.1°C
(°F). Treat any resolution above that specified for the normal data format as reference data.

Temperature Data Partitioning and Structure
Temperature Data (Actual Temperature x 100 Binary)
@@@@@@
Leftmost 3 Digits and Flags

15 14 13 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
Leftmost/ Temperature Open-circuit Not used.
Rightmost Flag Unit Flag Flag Temperature data
0: Leftmost 0: °C 0: Normal Always 0 ×165 ×164 ×163

1: Rightmost 1: °F 1: Error
Rightmost 3 Digits and Flags

15 14 13 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
Leftmost/ Temperature Open-circuit Not used.
Rightmost Flag Unit Flag Flag Temperature data
0: Leftmost 0: °C 0: Normal
1: Rightmost 1: °F 1: Error
Always 0 ×162 ×161 ×160
Leftmost/Rightmost Flag: Indicates whether the leftmost or rightmost 3 digits are provided.
Temperature Unit Flag: Indicates whether the temperature is in °C or °F.
Open-circuit Flag: Turns ON (1) when an open-circuit is detected. The temperature
data will be 7FF FFF if this flag is ON.
Data Conversion Examples

Example 1
Temperature: 1,130.25°C
×100: 113025
Temperature Data: 01B981 (hexadecimal for 113025)
Flags ×165 ×164 ×163

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 0 0 0 0 1 B 0 0 1 B 8
Normal Flags Temperature
°C
data
Units
Leftmost
Flags ×162 ×161 ×160

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 0
Data 1 0 0 0 9 8 1 8 9 8 1
°C data
Rightmost

Example 2
Temperature: -100.12°C
×100: -10012
Temperature Data: FFD8E4 (hexadecimal for -10012)

Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 0 0 0 F F D 0 F F D
°C
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 0 0 0 8 E 4 8 8 E 4

°C
data
Rightmost
Example 3
Temperature: -200.12°F
×100: -20012
Temperature Data: FFB1D4 (hexadecimal for -20012)
Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 1 0 0 F F B 4 F F B
°F
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 1 0 0 1 D 4 C 1 D 4

°F data
Rightmost
Example 4
Temperature: Open circuit (°F)
Temperature Data: 7FFFFF

Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 1 1 0 7 F F 6 7 F F
Error Flags Temperature
°F
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 1 1 0 F F F E F F F
Error Flags Temperature

°F
data
Rightmost

• Leftmost digits are stored in the lower memory addresses. Treat the data in the lower memory
address as the leftmost digits when programming.
• Be sure that the data is read at least once every 125 ms to allow for the CPU Unit’s cycle time
and communications time. Correct data may not be obtained if the read cycle is greater than
125 ms.
Programming Example
The following programming example shows how to use 2-decimal-place Mode for the following PLC
configuration.
CPU Unit CP1W-TS001

Inputs Inputs Temperature unit setting:

0 (°C)
CIO 0 CIO 2
CIO 1 CIO 3 Two-decimal-place Mode:
1 (2 digits after decimal point stored)
Outputs Outputs
CIO 100 None
CIO 101

In this example, 100 times the temperature data for temperature input 0 (input to CIO 002) is stored
in binary form in D100 to D102.
Temperature input 0 CIO 2 Leftmost data W100

Rightmost data
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D100 ×163 ×162 ×161 ×160
D101 ×167 ×166 ×165 ×164
D102 Always 0 Always 0 Always 0 0 0
8
Temperature Unit Flag (0: °C, 1: °F)
Open-circuit Flag (0: Normal, 1: Error)
Units

A200.11 (First Scan Flag)

MOV (1)
#0000 Sets D103 and D102 to #0100 and
#0000, respectively.
D102
MOV
#0100
D103
P_On (Always ON Flag)
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized.
W0.00 2.13 (open-circuit detected)
W0.01 Open-circuit alarm output
2.15 (leftmost digits)
SET W0.02
W0.02 2.15 (leftmost digits)
MOV (2)
2 Leftmost digits moved to W100.
2.15 (rightmost digits) W100

MOVD
(3)
Leftmost and rightmost digits rearranged
2 and moved to W102 and W101.
#0020
W101
MOVD (4)
2000
#0300
W101
MOVD (5)
2000
#0011
W102
RSET W0.02
SET W0.03 Data rearrangement completed.
W0.03 W102.7 (non-negative data)

BCDL (6)
If the temperature data is non-negative, the binary
W101
data in W102 and W101 is converted to BCD and
D100 placed in D101 and D100.
W102.7 (negative data)
-L(411) (7)
D102 If the temperature data is negative, the 2’s
complement data in W102 and W101 is converted
W101 to binary data representing the absolute value of
H0 the temperature input and placed in H1 and H0.
BCDL (8)
H0 The binary data in H1 and H0 is converted to
BCD and placed in D101 and D100.
D100
MOVD (9)
#0008 “1” is written to the bit in D101 indicating negative
data.
#0300
D101
REST W0.03

Description of Operation
CIO 2: Leftmost 3 digits of temperature data CIO 2: Rightmost 3 digits of temperature data
5 4 3
0 16 16 16 1 162 161 161
(2)
(3)
W100 0 165 164 163
(4)
(5)
(6)
W102 0 0 165 164 W101 164 163 161 160
If the temperature data is
non-negative, binary data is
converted to BCD data.
D101 0/8 106 105 104 D100 103 102 101 100
(9) If temperature data is negative, “8” is written here. (8)

If the temperature data is
(1) #0100 (1) #0000
negative, binary data is
D103 0 1 0 0 D102 0 0 0 0 converted to BCD data.
− W102 2’s complement data W101 2’s complement data
(7)
H1 0 0 165 164 H0 163 162 161 160
Binary
subtraction
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units

Overview
CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Unit provides up to four input points. The inputs can be from ther-
mocouples or analog inputs.
CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Unit is allocated four input words, so no more than three Units can
be connected.

8
 Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS003

(2) DIP Switch
(3) Expansion I/O

Connector Cable (1) Temperature Sensor or Analog Input Terminals
(Terminal block is not removable)

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples or analog inputs.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the input type (temperature or analog input), the input thermocouple type (K or J) and
the temperature unit (°C or °F). Make the setting according to the specifications of the tempera-
ture sensors or analog inputs that are connected.


I/O Unit.The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.

Specifications
Item CP1W-TS003
Temperature sensors Thermocouples or analog input *1
Switchable between K and J, but same type must be used for all
inputs.
Number of inputs 4
Allocated input words 4
Max. number of Units 3
Accuracy at 25°C Thermocouple (The larger of +/-0.5% of converted value or ±2°C) ±1 digit max. *2
inputs
Analog voltage 0.5% full scale
inputs
Analog current 0.6% full scale
inputs
Accuracy at 0 to 55 °C Thermocouple (The larger of ±1% of converted value or ±4°C) ±1 digit max. *3
inputs
Analog voltage 1.0% full scale
inputs
Analog current 1.2% full scale
inputs
Input signal range Thermocouple K: -200.0 to 1300.0°C or -300.0 to 2300.0°F
inputs J: -100.0 to 850.0°C or -100.0 to 1500.0°F
Analog voltage 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V
inputs
Analog current 4 to 20mA
inputs
Resolution Thermocouple 0.1°C or 0.1°F
inputs
Analog inputs 1/12000 (full scale)
Max. rated input Analog voltage ±15V
inputs
Analog current ±30mA
inputs
External input imped- Analog voltage 1MΩ min.
ance inputs
Analog current 250 Ω
inputs
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Averaging function Unsupported
Conversion time 250 ms for 4 input points
Converted temperature data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
2-decimal-place mode is not supported
Converted AD data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
Isolation Photocouplers between any two input signals
*1 Only last two channels can be used as analog input.
*2 Accuracy for a K-type sensor at −100°C or less is ±4°C ±1 digit max.

 Analog Input Signal Ranges

Analog input data is digitally converted according to the input signal range as shown below.
When the input exceeds the specified range, the A/D conversion data will be fixed at either the
lower limit or upper limit.
0 to 10 V
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V

FDA8 (−600)
1 to 5 V
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 0.8 V, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600) 8
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 0.8 V 8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units

1V 5 V 5.2 V
FDA8 (−600)

4 to 20 mA
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 3.2 mA, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 3.2 mA

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FDA8 (−600)
 Open-circuit Detection Function for Temperature

If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the converted tem-
perature data will be set to 7FFF.
 Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs

age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2
mA. When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
Flow of Operation
Sensor Units.
• Set the input type (temperature or analog input), the input thermo-
2 Set the temperature or
analog ranges. couple type (K or J) and the temperature unit (°C or °F).
• Connect temperature sensors or analog devices.

sensors or analog devices.
• Read converted data stored in the input words.

program.

CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS003

C O M 01 03 05 07 09 11 C O M 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 05 07
2 Set temperature or analog ranges.

Do not touch the DIP switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may cause operating
errors.

Caution
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for 8

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch, set the input type (temperature or analog
input), the input thermocouple type (K or J) and the temperature unit (°C or °F).
SW 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
SW Setting
1 Thermocouple type of ON J
temperature sensor OFF K
2 Temperature unit ON °F
OFF °C
3 NC
4 Input type selection for ON Analog input
the third input (Input 2) OFF Thermocouple
5 Input type selection for ON Analog input
the fourth input (Input 3) OFF Thermocouple
6 Analog input signal ON 1 to 5V/4 to 20mA
range OFF 0 to 10V
Temperature input Analog input

Input type Range (°C) Range (°F) Input type Range
K -200.0 to 1300.0 -300.0 to 2300.0 Voltage 0 to 10V/1 to 5V
J -100.0 to 850.0 -100.0 to 1500.0 Current 4 to 20mA
Fahrenheit temperature uses the following equation to convert the temperature unit from Cel-
sius, but the temperature input range is different between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Fahrenheit temperature (°F) = Celsius temperature (°C) x 1.8 + 32
3 Connect Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all four thermocouples must be the
same type and the same input range. Only last two channels can be used as analog inputs.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
LOOP0− LOOP1− NC NC I IN2 COM2 COM3
Temperature input 0
compensator


measurement.
(2) Analog Inputs

Last two channels can be used as analog inputs, but two of the analog inputs must be the
same range.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−

Temperature input 0
Cold junction Analog Analog
compensator device device
Temperature input 1 with with
current voltage
output output
Analog Analog
input 2 input 3
• Wiring for Analog Inputs
+ twisted-pair cable V IN +
twisted-pair cable
V IN
8
Analog Analog
device with I IN Analog device with I IN Analog

voltage input 2,3 current input 2,3
output − COM − COM
output
FG FG

• When an input is not being used, short the + and – terminals.
power supply.


(1) Word Allocations
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Four input words are allocated to CP1W-TS003.
• Example
CP1E CP1W-TS003
CIO 4
CIO 5
Output word CIO 100 None
addresses CIO 101
(2) Reading Temperature or Analog Data

The temperature or analog data will be stored in the input words allocated to the Tempera-
ture Sensor Unit in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Reading Temperature Data Reading Analog Data
m+1 Converted temperature data from input 0 m+3 Converted analog data from input 2
m+2 Converted temperature data from input 1 m+4 Converted analog data from input 3
m+3 Converted temperature data from input 2
m+4 Converted temperature data from input 3
“m” is the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit
connected immediately before the Temperature Sensor Unit.
• Negative values are stored as 2’s complements.
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored without the
decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Unit: 0.1°C K or J ×10 500.0°C → 5000 → 1388 hex
−20.0°C → −200 → FF38 hex
−200.0°C → −2000 → F830 hex
• If the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20°C or ±20°F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the con-
verted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
convertible range.
After power is turned ON, approximately 1 s is required for the first conversion data to be
stored in the input word. During that period, the data will be 7FFE. Therefore, create a pro-
gram as shown below, so that the ladder can start to operate with valid conversion data in
input words.
Always ON
P_On
CMP
2 Temperature input data
#7FFE
output word
(P_EQ)
Initialization
Completed Flag
W0.00


The following programming example shows how to store the input data of CP1W-TS003 (4
inputs) in D0 to D3, and W10.00 to W10.03 turn ON at the time of open-circuit detection.
CP1E CP1W-TS003
Input word CIO 0 CIO 2 Temperature unit setting: OFF(ºC)
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range setting
CIO 4 Input 0: Thermocouple K(CIO2)
CIO 5
Input 1: Thermocouple K(CIO3)
Output word CIO 100 None Input 2: Thermocouple K(CIO4)
addresses CIO 101 Input 3: Analog input 1 to 5V(CIO5)
• DIP Switch Setting

SW1 OFF K
SW2 OFF °C
SW3 NC
SW4 OFF Thermocouple
SW5 ON Analog
SW6 ON 1 to 5V/4 to 20mA
• Wiring Diagram
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+ I IN3

V IN2 V IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
Temperature input 0
Cold junction Temperature Analog
compensator input 2 device
Temperature input 1 with
voltage
output
8
Analog
input 3

(1 to 5 V)

Detects initialization complete
<>(305) MOV(021) Stores input 0’s data in D0.

#7FFE 2
2 D0
ON when an open-circuit alarm has been

=(300) W10.00 detected for thermocouples input 2.
#7FFF
2

#7FFE 3
3 D1

#7FFF
3

#7FFE 4
4 D2

#7FFF
4

#7FFE 5
5 D3

=(300) W10.03 detected for analog input 3.
#8000
5

8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units
Overview
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Unit provide up to twelve input points. The inputs can be from
thermocouples.
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Unit is allocated two input words and one output word, so no
more than seven Units can be connected.
 Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS004
(3) Expansion I/O

Connector Cable (1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals

(2) DIP Switch

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the temperature input range. Make the setting
according to the specifications of the temperature sensors that are connected.
(3)Expansion I/O Connecting Cable 8
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1E CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit. The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be

removed.


Specifications
Item CP1W-TS004
Temperature sensors Thermocouples
Switchable between K and J, but same type must be used for all inputs.
Number of inputs 12
Allocated input words 2
Allocated output words 1
Accuracy 25°C (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value or ±2°C) ±1 digit max. *1
0 to 55°C (The larger of ±1% of converted value or ±4°C) ±1 digit max. *2
Conversion time 500 ms for 12 input points
Converted temperature data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
2-decimal-place mode is not supported
Isolation Photocouplers between any two input signals

 Open-circuit Detection Function for Temperature

If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the converted tem-
perature data will be set to 7FFF.
Flow of Operation
Sensor Units.
• Set the temperature unit and set the temperature input range.
2 Set the temperature ranges.
• Connect temperature sensors.

sensors.
• Read converted data stored in the input words.

program.
CP1E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS004

C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06

2 Set temperature ranges.

Do not touch the DIP switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may cause operating
errors.

Caution
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch, set the temperature unit and the temperature
input range.
SW1
SW2
ON
OFF
8
SW Setting
1 Input type ON J

OFF K
2 Temperature unit ON °F
OFF °C
Temperature input
Input type Range (°C) Range (°F)
K -200.0 to 1300.0 -300.0 to 2300.0
J -100.0 to 850.0 -100.0 to 1500.0
Fahrenheit temperature uses the following equation to convert the temperature unit from Cel-
sius, but the temperature input range is different between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Fahrenheit temperature (°F) = Celsius temperature (°C) × 1.8 + 32

3 Connecte Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all twelve thermocouples must be the
same type and the same input range.
Temperature input 1
Cold junction
compensator Temperature input 11
Temperature input 0

measurement.
• Use the thermocouple with metallic shield and connect the shield to ground.

(1) Word Allocations
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Two input words and one output word are allocated to
CP1W-TS004.
• Example
CP1E CP1W-TS004
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102

addresses CIO 101

(2) Reading Temperature Data

There are 12 temperature input data to be read, but only two input words are allocated to
CP1W-TS004. The operation is shown as the following.
• Input Word
m+1 Response. Input words stored in CIO m+2
m+2 Temperature data of the specified input word
• Output Word
n+1 Read command data (input word specified)
• Read/Response Command and Temperature Data

Output
Input Word
Word
Command n+1 m+1 m+2
Read Response Temperature data
command command (4-digit hexadecimal)
Read temperature data from input 0 #9901 9901 Input 0 temperature data

Read temperature data from input 9 #990A 990A Input 9 temperature data
Read temperature data from input 10 #990B 990B Input 10 temperature data
Read temperature data from input 11 #990C 990C Input 11 temperature data
Others Others No response for other commands
8
• Negative values are stored as 2’s complements.
• The converted temperature data CIO m+2 is stored in 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexa-

decimal).
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored without the
decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Unit: 0.1°C K or J ×10 500.0°C → 5000 → 1388 hex
-20.0°C → -200 → FF38 hex
-200.0°C → -2000 → F830 hex
• IIf the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20×C or ±20×F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operrate and the
converted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
convertible range.

(3) Creating Ladder Program

(1) Write temperature data command
Write temperature data command which read temperature data from input word to CIO
n+1.
(2) Response confirmation
After CP1W-TS004 receives CIO n+1 read command and CP1W-TS004’s internally
specified input temperature data is ready, the value which is the same as the read
command will be stored in CIO m+1. The temperature data will be stored in CIO m+2
at the same time.
(3) Read temperature data
Store the temperature data from CIO m+2 in DM area.
The power is ON
CIO n+1
(1) Write temperature data
command
Read command
and response are
CIO m+1
unmatched
(2) Response confirmation
Read command
matches response
CIO m+2
(3) Read temperature data
Store in DM area
Response 7FFE #9901 #9902

CIO m+1
Temperature data Input 1 Input 2

7FFE
CIO m+2 temperature data temperature data
2ms max. from writing read

Approx. 1s Approx. 2ms command, response, to reading
temperature data
Read command 0000 #9901 #9902 #9903

CIO n+1
Power ON Write input 1 Write input 2

temperature data temperature data
command command
Note 1 It takes about 2ms maximum until it is reflected to CIO m+1 and m+2 from writing the read command to
CIO n+1.
2 It takes about 1s after the power is turned ON, till a read command initial processing of CP1W-TS004 is
completed, so a response to the read command after power ON takes only about 1s. After the power is
turned ON, create a ladder program 1s later due to its control by temperature data.
3 When writing a command other than that specified in the temperature data read command, CIO m+1 and
m+2 hold the previous value.


The temperature data of CP1W-TS004 (12 inputs, input type is J type and temperature unit
is °C) is stored in D0 to D11.
When it occurs open-circuit alarm, W10.00 to W10.11 is ON.
CP1E CP1W-TS004
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range
J: SW1 OFF
Temperature unit
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102 ˚C: SW2 ON
addresses CIO 101
• Temperature Data Storage Address

Input word Read command Temperature data Open-circuit alarm
CIO n+1 storage address
Input 0 #9901 D0 W0.00
Input 1 #9902 D1 W0.01
Input 2 #9903 D2 W0.02
Input 3 #9904 D3 W0.03
Input 4 #9905 D4 W0.04
Input 5 #9906 D5 W0.05

Input 6 #9907 D6 W0.06
Input 7 #9908 D7 W0.07
Input 8 #9909 D8 W0.08
Input 9 #990A D9 W0.09
Input 10 #990B D10 W0.10
Input 11 #990C D11 W0.11

First Cycle ON Flag

SET Start to read temperature data.
W0.00
W0.00
MOV(021) Write input 0’s read command
#9901 (#9901) to CIO 102 (CIO n+1).
102
=(300) MOV(021) If CIO 2 (CIO m+1) and read

command are matched, store
#9901 3 Read Input 0’s
the temperature data (CIO
2 D0 m+2) to D0. temperature data
W10.00 turns ONat the time of

=(300) W10.00 open-circuit detection (7FFF).
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.01
RSET
W0.00
W0.01
MOV(021)
#9902
102
=(300) MOV(021)
2 D1 temperature data
=(300) W10.01
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.02
RSET
W0.01
W0.02
MOV(021)
#9903
102
=(300) MOV(021)
=(300) W10.02
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.03
RSET
W0.02

W0.03
MOV(021)
#9904
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9904 3
Read Input 3’s
=(300) W10.03
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.04
RSET
W0.03
W0.04
MOV(021)
#9905
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9905 3
Read Input 4’s

=(300) W10.04
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.05
RSET
W0.04
W0.05
MOV(021)
#9906
102 8
=(300) MOV(021)
#9906 3

Read Input 5’s
=(300) W10.05
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.06
RSET
W0.05

W0.06
MOV(021)
#9907
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9907 3
Read Input 6’s
=(300) W10.06
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.07
RSET
W0.06
W0.07
MOV(021)
#9908
102
=(300) MOV(021)
=(300) W10.07
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.08
RSET
W0.07
W0.08
MOV(021)
#9909
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9909 3
Read Input 8’s
=(300) W10.08
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.09
RSET
W0.08

W0.09
MOV(021)
#990A
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#990A 3 Read Input 9’s
=(300) W10.09
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.10
RSET
W0.09
W0.10
MOV(021)
#990B
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#990B 3 Read Input 10’s

=(300) W10.10
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.11
RSET
W0.10
W0.11
MOV(021)
#990C
102 8
=(300) MOV(021)
#990C 3 Read Input 11’s

=(300) W10.11
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.00
RSET
W0.11

8-5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units
8-5-1 Overview
The CP1E CPU Unit can function as a slave to a CompoBus/S Master Unit when a CP1W-SRT21 Com-
poBus/S I/O Link Unit is connected. The CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit establishes an I/O link of 8 inputs
and 8 outputs between the Master Unit and the PLC.
CompoBus/S Master Unit

(or SRM1 CompoBus/S CP1W-SRT21
Master Control Unit) CompoBus/S
CP1E CPU Unit I/O Link Unit
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
S No.
COMM
ERR
SRT21
EXP
BD H NC( BS+)
BD L NC( BS-) N C
Special flat cable or VCTF cable
From the standpoint of the CP1E CPU Unit, the 8 input bits and 8 output bits allocated to the Compo-
Bus/S I/O Link Unit are identical to input and output bits allocated to Expansion I/O Units even though
the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit does not control actual inputs and outputs, i.e., I/O is performed for I/O
memory in the CPU Unit to which the CompoBus/S Master Unit is mounted.
Master PLC (CS Series) CP1E (CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O Points)
CPU Unit CompoBus/S

CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
I/O memory Master Unit I/O memory Node
Unit No. 0
number: 0
8 bits 8 bits Input
Output
CIO 2000 CIO 2
8 bits 8 bits Output
Input
CIO 2004 CIO 102

 CP1W-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
(2) DIP Switch
S No.
COMM
ERR
(3) LED Indicators
SRT21

EXP
BD NC(BS+)
BD NC(BS-) NC
(4) Expansion I/O Connecting Cable (1) CompoBus/S Terminals

(1)CompoBus/S Terminals
The following CompoBus/S terminals are provided: CompoBus/S communications data high/low
terminals, NC terminals for communications power supply plus (+) and minus (-), and an NC ter-
minal. (Power is supplied internally for this Unit, so the NC terminals for communications power
supply can be used as relay terminals.)
(2)DIP Switch
Used to specify the node number for the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
NODE NUMBER Pin labels Contents
HOLD
DR 1
1
2
4
8
Node Number SW1

2 Setting 8 4 2 1
ON
4 0 0 0 0 0
8 1 0 0 0 1
SW1 2 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1
8 1 0 0 0
9 1 0 0 1
10 1 0 1 0
11 1 0 1 1
12 1 1 0 0
13 1 1 0 1
14 1 1 1 0

15 1 1 1 1
1 = ON, 0 = OFF
* The long-distance communications mode
can be used only when one of the DR ON Long-distance communications mode *
following Master Units is connected: OFF High-speed communications mode
C200HW-SRM21-V1, CQM1-SRM21-V1,
HOLD ON Retain outputs after a communications error.
SRM1-C0@-V2, CS1W-SRM21 or CJ1W-
SRM21. OFF Clear outputs after a communications error.
(3)LED Indicators
Used to show the CompoBus/S communications status.
Indicator Name Color Meaning
8
COMM Communications indicator Yellow ON: Communications in progress.
OFF: Communications stopped or error has occurred.

ERR Error indicator Red ON: A communications error has occurred.
OFF: Indicates normal communications or stand-by.

I/O Unit. The cable is provided with the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit and cannot be removed.

Used to connect Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units.

Model CP1W-SRT21
Master/slave CompoBus/S Slave
Number of I/O points 8 input points, 8 output points
Number of words allocated in 1 input word, 1 output word
CPU Unit I/O memory
Node number setting Set using the DIP switch (Set before turning on the CPU Unit’s power
supply.)
1 Connect the Unit.

• Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
• The node number should be a unique number between 0 and 15.

2 Determine the node
• Use the DIP switch to set the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit’s node
number of the
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit number, communications mode, and the status of output data
and set the DIP switch. when a communications error occurs.
• Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to a CompoBus/S trans-

3 Wire the CompoBus/S mission path.
transmission path.
1 Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-SRT21
CP1E CPU Unit CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
S No.
COMM
ERR
SRT21
EXP
BD H NC( BS+)
BD L NC( BS-) N C

 I/O Words Allocation

I/O words are allocated to the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit in the same way as to other Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units, i.e., the next available input and output words are allocated. As
shown below, when “m” is the last allocated input word and “n” is the last allocated output word, the
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is allocated “m+1” as its input word and “n+1” as its output word.
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Word m+1
8 inputs
8 outputs
Word n+1
In the following example, a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is connected as the first Unit after the CP1E
CPU Unit.
CP1E CPU Unit with CompoBus/S

30 or 40 I/O Points I/O LInk Unit
Input words CIO 0 CIO 2
CIO 1
Output words CIO 100 CIO 102

CIO 101
The input word (m+1) contains the data from the Master Unit and the CompoBus/S communications
status.
15 09 08 07 00
Word m+1
CompoBus/S Communications Error Flag Data from the Master Unit

0: Normal; 1: Error
CompoBus/S Communication Status Flag 8

0: Stopped; 1: Communicating
Write the data to be transmitted to the Master Unit in the output word (n+1).

15 07 00
Word n+1
Data to be transferred to the Master Unit

The 8 bits of I/O data are not always transmitted simultaneously.
• 8 bits of data transmitted from the Master CPU Unit at the same time will not always reach the
CP1E CPU Unit.
• 8 bits of data transmitted from the CP1E CPU Unit at the same time will not always reach the
Master CPU Unit simultaneously.
When the 8 bits of input data must be read together, modify the ladder program in the CPU Unit
receiving the data. For example, read the input data twice in succession and accept the data
only when the two values match.

• Unused bits in the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit’s output words can be used as work bits.
• Unused bits in input word cannot be used as work bits.
2 Determine the node number and make DIP switch settings.
(1) Determining Node Number

• The CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is a Slave Unit with 8 input bits and 8 output bits. The
node number setting is made using the DIP switch; the inputs and outputs share the
same node number.
• The range of possible node number settings is determined by the type of PLC the Mas-
ter Unit is mounted to and the settings on the Master Unit.
For details, refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (Cat. No. W266).
(2) Making DIP Switch Settings
Use the DIP switch to set the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit’s node number, communications
mode, and the status of output data when a communications error occurs.

Always turn OFF the power supply before changing the DIP switch settings.
3 Wire the CompoBus/S communications path.
These terminals are not used. They can

however be used as communications power
BD H NC (BS+) supply relay terminals.
BD L NC (BS−) NC
BD L
BD H Connect the CompoBus/S Communications Cable.

pp
Appendices
A-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-1-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-1-2 Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-1-4 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-2-2 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A-2-3 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-2-4 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
App
A-3-3 Converting the Built-in RS-232C Port to RS-422A/485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-3-4 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) A-1

Appendices
A-1 Dimensions
A-1-1 CPU Units
CPU Units with 10 I/O Points
 CP1E-E10D-
Unit: mm
66 85
56 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O Points
 CP1E-14D-/20D-
Unit: mm
86 85
76
8
110 100 90
2-φ4.5
A-2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

Appendices
 CP1E-E14/20SD-
Unit: mm
86 78.6
76
8
110 100 90
2-φ4.5

CPU Units with Built-in Analog and 20 I/O Points
 CP1E-30D-, CP1E-NA20D-
Unit: mm
130 85
120 8
A-1 Dimensions
110 100 90
App
4-φ4.5
 CP1E-30S(1)D- A-1-1 CPU Units
Unit: mm
130 78.6
120 8
110100 90
4-φ4.5

Appendices
 CP1E-40D-
Unit: mm
150 85
140 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
 CP1E-40S(1)D-
Unit: mm
150 78.6
140 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
 CP1E-N60D-
Unit: mm
195 85
185 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5

Appendices
 CP1E-60S(1)D-
Unit: mm
195 78.6
185 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
A-1-2 Option Boards
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
16.5
35.9 13.5
37.3
35.9
A-1 Dimensions
5.1
16.5
19.7
App
A-1-2 Option Boards

Appendices
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
16.5
35.9 13.5
35.9
37.3
8.9
15.7
16.5
CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A/485 Option Board

Unit: mm
16.5
0.15
30.3
36.4 28.2
7.9
37.3
36.4
CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board

Unit: mm
36.4 28.2
14.7
37.3
36.4
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX

Appendices
CP1W-MAB221 Analog Input/Output Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
8
33.6
28.2
CP1W-ADB21 Analog Input Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
A-1 Dimensions
8
33.6
28.2
App
CP1W-DAB21V Analog Output Option Board A-1-2 Option Boards
Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
3
33.6
28.2

Appendices
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units
CP1W-8ED Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Input Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
56±0.2 5 8
66 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-8E Expansion I/O Units with 8 Output Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
56±0.2 5 8
66 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-16E Expansion I/O Units with 16 Output Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50

Appendices
CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1 Expansion I/O Units with 32 Output Points

Unit: mm
150
140
110 100 90
4-φ4.5 8
50
CP1W-20ED Expansion I/O Units with 20 I/O Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
A-1 Dimensions
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-40ED Expansion I/O Units with 40 I/O Points
App
Unit: mm
150
140 A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units
110 100 90
4-φ4.5 8
50

Appendices
A-1-4 Expansion Units
CP1W-MAD11/MAD42/MAD44 Analog I/O Units

5 Unit: mm
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Unit

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-DA021/DA041/DA042 Analog Output Unit

5 Unit: mm
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50

Appendices
CP1W-TS1/2/3 Temperature Sensor Units

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 50
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Units

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
A-1 Dimensions
140±0.2 5 Two,4.5 dia. 8
150 holes 50
CP1W-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit App

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
56±0.2 5 8
66 2-φ4.5 50

Appendices
A-2 Wiring Diagrams
A-2-1 CPU Units
CPU Unit with 10 I/O Points (Terminal Block is not removable)

Input Wiring Diagram Output Wiring Diagram
 All Models  Relay Outputs
AC Power Supply CP1E-E10DR-
CP1E-E10D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
L L L L
CP1E-E10D-D
00 01 02 03
CIO 0
COM COM NC COM NC
- +
24V DC
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 CIO 100

NC 00 02 04
 Transistor Outputs (Sinking)

DC Power Supply
CP1E-E10DT-
+ - COM
CIO 100
NC
E10D-D CIO 0
L L L L
00 01 02 03
COM COM NC COM NC
CIO 100
 Transistor Outputs (Sourcing)

CP1E-E10DT1-
CIO 100
L L L L
00 01 02 03
COM COM NC COM NC
CIO 100

Appendices

AC Power Supply CP1E-E14DR-A/E14SDR-A
CP1E-E14DR-A/E14SDR-A CP1E-N14DR-
CP1E-N14D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L
CP1E-N14D-D
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
CIO 0
COM COM NC COM NC COM NC
- +
24V DC
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
CIO 100
NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC

DC Power Supply
+ - COM
CP1E-N14DT-
NC CIO 100
N14D-D CIO 0
L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

CIO 100

CP1E-N14DT1-
CIO 100
L L L L L L
App
A-2-1 CPU Units
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
CIO 100

Appendices

AC Power Supply CP1E-E20DR-A/E20SDR-A
CP1E-E20DR-A/E20SDR-A CP1E-N20DR-
CP1E-N20D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L L
CP1E-N20D-D
00 01 02 03 04 05 07
CIO 0
COM COM NC COM NC COM 06
- +
24V DC L
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 CIO 100
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
DC Power Supply CP1E-N20DT-
+ - COM CIO 100
NC
N20D-D CIO 0 L L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 07
CIO 100

CP1E-N20DT1-
CIO 100
L L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 07
CIO 100

Appendices
CPU Units with 30 I/O Points (Terminal Block is not removable)

AC Power Supply CP1E-30DR-/30SDR-A
CP1E-E30DR-A/E30SDR-A CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-N30D-A/N30S(1)D-A
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L L L
CP1E-N30D-D/N30S(1)D-D
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
CIO 0 CIO 1
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
- +
L L L
24V DC L
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
DC Power Supply
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC COM
DC Power Supply
N30DR-D
+ - COM
NC
N30D-D
CIO 0 CIO 1

CP1E-N30S(1)DT-D CP1E-N30DT-
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
L L
L L
L L
L L
App
DC Power Supply
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC CIO 100 CIO 101
NC COM A-2-1 CPU Units

N30DT-D

CP1E-N30S(1)DT1-D CP1E-N30DT1-
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
L L
L L
L L
L L
CIO 101 DC Power Supply

CIO 100
NC CIO 100 CIO 101
NC COM
N30DT1-D

Appendices

AC Power Supply CP1E-40DR-/40SDR-A
CP1E-E40DR-A/E40SDR-A CIO 100 CIO 101
CP1E-N40D-A/N40S(1)D-A
DC Power Supply L L L L L L L L L L L
CP1E-N40D-D/N40S(1)D-D
CIO 0 CIO 1 + 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06

- +
24V DC
+ - L L L L L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
DC Power Supply
NC 00
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC
N40DR-D
CIO 0 CIO 1
DC Power Supply
+ - COM
NC
N40D-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 + 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(-) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 - COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
L L L L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply
CIO 100 CIO 101 NC 00 CIO 100 CIO 101
NC
N40DT-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 + 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(+) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 - COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
L L L L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply
CIO 100 CIO 101 NC 00 CIO 100 CIO 101
NC
N40DT1-D

Appendices

AC Power Supply CP1E-N60DR-/60SDR-A
CP1E-E60SDR-A
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CP1E-N60D-A/N60S(1)D-A L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
CP1E-N60D-D/N60S(1)D-D
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
L L L L L L L L
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
- +
24 V DC
+ -
DC Power Supply
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC COM
N60DR-D
DC Power Supply
+ - COM
NC
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
N60D-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102 CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 - COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L L L L L L L L L
L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
NC COM
N60DT-D
App
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102 A-2-1 CPU Units
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 - COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
DC Power Supply
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
NC COM CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
N60DT1-D

Appendices
CPU Units with Built-in Analog and 20 I/O Points

(Terminal Block is not removable)
AC Power Supply CP1E-NA20DR-A
CP1E-NA20D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
CIO 190
CP1E-NA20D-D L L L L L L
Analog Output
CIO 0
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC I OUT0
- + - COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC V OUT0 COM0

24V DC
+ - CIO 90 CIO 91 Analog Output
L L
Analog Input CIO 190
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 I IN0 AG I IN1

00 02 04 06 08 10 V IN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1
DC Power Supply
Analog Input NC
DC Power Supply
CIO 100
NC COM
+ - COM CIO 90 CIO 91
NA20DR-D
NC
NA20D-D  Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
CIO 0
CP1E-NA20DT-D
CIO 100
CIO 190
L L L L L L
Analog Output
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC I OUT0
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC V OUT0 COM0
Analog Output
L L
CIO 190
CIO 100

CP1E-NA20DT1-D
CIO 100
CIO 190
L L L L L L
Analog Output
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC I OUT0
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC V OUT0 COM0
Analog Output
L L
CIO 190
CIO 100

Appendices
Analog Input Wiring Diagram Analog Output Wiring Diagram
Analog + V IN V OUT + Analog

Analog Analog
output input
Input Output I OUT
device device
Terminal Terminal
(voltage − COM COM − (voltage
Block Block
output) input)
Voltage Input Voltage Output
Analog + V IN + Analog
output
Analog Analog V OUT
I IN Input input
device Output I OUT
Terminal device
Terminal COM
(current − COM
Block − (current
output) Block
input)
Current Input Current Output
VIN0 Analog input 0 voltage input VOUT0 Analog output 0 voltage output
IIN0 Analog input 0 current input IOUT0 Analog output 0 current output
COM0 Analog input 0 common COM0 Analog output 0 common
AG Analog 0V
VIN1 Analog input 1 voltage input
IIN1 Analog input 1 current input
IOUT0
COM1 Analog input 1 common
VOUT0 COM0
+ -
IIN0 AG IIN1 Analog input
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

device
(Voltage input)
VIN0 COM0 VIN1 COM1
IOUT0
+ - + -
VOUT0 COM0
Analog output Analog output
App
device device
(Voltage output) (Current output)
+ - A-2-1 CPU Units
Note 1 Use 2-conductor shielded twisted-pair cable for the Analog input
device
I/O wiring, and do not connect the shield AG termi- (Current input)
nal.
2 If an input is not being used, connect (short) the
input’s + and - terminals.
3 Wire I/O lines apart from power lines (AC power sup-
ply lines, three-phase power lines, etc.).
4 If noise is received from power supply lines, insert a
noise filter in the power supply input section.
5 When noise disturbs the analog input/output cable,
install the core to improve anti-noise performance.

Appendices
Input Wiring Example When Using External Power Supply

AC-power-supply E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units have an external power supply
(DC24V 0.3A), and can be used as a service power supply for input devices.
DC-power-supply E10/14/20(S) or N14/20 CPU Units have no external power supply.
Wiring Example: AC-power-supply CPU Units with 40 I/O Points
Input device
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
Input terminal
Input device
Output terminal
24VDC 0.3A
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
OUTPUT

Appendices

The first input word allocated to the Expansion I/O Unit is shown as CIO m and the first output word is
shown as CIO n.
8-point Input Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)


Outputs not provided.
24V DC
- +
+
-
CIO m
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07 The COM terminals

on the upper terminal
block and the COM
+ terminals on the lower
- terminal block are
24V DC - + internally connected,
but they must also be
wired externally.
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

8-point Output Units (Terminal Block is not removable)
Inputs not provided.  Relay Outputs
CP1W-8ER
App
24V DC
L L L L
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
24V DC
L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided.  Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
CP1W-8ET
+
4.5 to 30 VDC L L L L
-
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
-
L L 4.5 to 30 VDC L L
+

CP1W-8ET1
-
4.5 to 30 VDC L L L L
+
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
+
L L 4.5 to 30 VDC L L
-

CP1W-16ER
L L
NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM CIO n
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided.
L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L

CP1W-16ET
L L
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L
App
CP1W-16ET1 A-2-2 Expansion I/O Units
L L
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided. Unit Lower Terminal Block
L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L

CP1W-32ER
CIO n CIO n+1
L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
L L L L L L L L L L L
CIO n CIO n+1

CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3

Appendices

Inputs not provided.  Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
CP1W-32ET
CIO n CIO n+1
L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
App
CP1W-32ET1
CIO n CIO n+1

L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1

Appendices

Inputs not provided. Unit Lower Terminal Block
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
20-point I/O Units (Terminal Block is not removable)

CIO m CP1W-20EDR1
24V DC +
-
+
- L L L L L L
00 01 02 04 05 07
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 CIO n
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
L L
CIO m
CP1W-20EDT
L L L L L L
00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO n
L L

Appendices

CP1W-20EDT1
L L L L L L
00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO n
L L
40-point I/O Units (Terminal Block is not removable)

CIO m CIO m+1
CP1W-40EDR
CIO n CIO n+1
24V DC
- +
+ -
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
L L L L L
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

CIO m CIO m+1
CIO n CIO n+1

CP1W-40EDT
CIO n CIO n+1
App
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
L L L L L
CIO n CIO n+1

CP1W-40EDT1
CIO n CIO n+1
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
L L L L L
CIO n CIO n+1

Appendices
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
 Input Terminal Arrangement
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
IN CH
I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG I IN3 Current input 3
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
Note For current inputs, short V IN1 to I IN1, V IN2 to I IN2, V IN3 to I IN3, and V IN4 to I IN4.
 Wiring Methods

+ twisted-pair cable V IN +
twisted-pair cable
V IN
device with Analog I IN
I IN device with Input
voltage Input
current Unit
output − COM Unit − COM
output
FG FG
Example:

Connection to
input 1 for
voltage input
+ Voltage
output
–
Connection to
input 2 for
current input
+
Current output
–

Appendices
CP1W-DA021 Analog Output Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
 Output Terminal Arrangement
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC COM1 Output common 1
 Wiring Methods
I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG
Example:
IOUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC
VOUT1 COM1 IOUT2 NC NC NC NC
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

Connection to
output 1 for
voltage output
+
Voltage
App
Input
–

Connection to
output 2 for
current output
+
Current
Input
–

Appendices
CP1W-DA041/DA042 Analog Output Unit (Terminal Block is not

removable)
Wiring Diagrams
 Output Terminal Arrangement
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC I OUT3 Current output 3
 Wiring Methods
I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG
Example:
IOUT1 VOUT2 COM2 IOUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC
VOUT1 COM1 IOUT2 VOUT3 COM3 IOUT4 NC

Connection to
output 1 for
voltage output
+
Voltage
Input
–
Connection to
output 2 for
current output
+
Current
Input
–

Appendices
CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
 I/O Terminal Arrangement
V OUT Voltage output

I OUT Current output
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
COM1 Input common 1
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.
 Wiring Methods
• Wiring Analog Inputs

I IN I IN
with I/O Unit with I/O Unit
voltage − COM current − COM
output output
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

FG FG
• Wiring Analog Outputs

App
I OUT I OUT
I/O Unit with I/O Unit with
COM − voltage COM − current
input input A-2-3 Expansion Units
FG FG

Appendices
Wiring Diagrams
Example:
I OUT NC NC V IN0 COM0 IIN1 AG
VOUT COM NC NC I IN0 V IN1 COM1

Connection to
input for
voltage output
+
Voltage input
–
Connection to
input 0 for
voltage input
+
Voltage output
–
Connection to
input 1 for
current input
+
Current output
–

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
• Input Terminal Arrangement V IN1 Voltage input 1
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
• Output Terminal Arrangement

A-2 Wiring Diagrams

 Wiring Methods
App
I IN I IN
−
voltage COM current − COM
output output
FG FG

I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
• Input Terminal Arrangement
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
• Output Terminal Arrangement
 Wiring Methods

I IN I IN
voltage − COM current − COM
output output
FG FG

I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG

Appendices
CP1W-TS001/TS002/TS101/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units

Wiring Diagrams
 Connecting a Thermocouple
• CP1W-TS001
One or two K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS001.
Both of the thermocouples must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC
+ +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC NC NC
− −
Temperature input 0
Cold junction compensator
Temperature input 1
• CP1W-TS002
One to four K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS002.
All of the thermocouples must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

Example:
Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 NC
+ + + +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC Input 2 Input 3
− − − −
App
Temperature input 0
compensator

Appendices
Wiring Diagrams
 Connecting a Platinum Resistance Thermometer
• CP1W-TS101
One or two Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the CP1W-TS101.
Both of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
A A B
B B B
Pt Pt

• CP1W-TS102
One to four Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the CP1W-TS102.
All of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
A A B A A B
B B B B B B
Pt Pt Pt Pt
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

input 0 input 1 input 2 input 3

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all four of the thermocouples must be of the
same type and the same input range must be used for each. Only last two channels can be used as
analog inputs.
Example:
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
Temperature input 0
compensator
 Connecting Analog Inputs

Only last two channels can be used as analog inputs.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

Temperature input 0
Cold junction Analog Analog
App
compensator device device
Temperature input 1 with with
current voltage
output output
Analog Analog
input 2 input 3

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all twelve of the thermocouples must be of the
same type and the same input range must be used for each.
Example:
Temperature input 1
Cold junction
compensator Temperature input 11
Temperature input 0
CP1W-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit

Wiring Diagrams
These terminals are not used. They can

however be used as communications power
BD H NC (BS+) supply relay terminals.
BD L NC (BS−) NC
BD L
BD H Connect the CompoBus/S Communications Cable.

Appendices
A-2-4 Serial Communications
Wiring Examples for PTs Using NT Link

 Connecting a PT and a PLC 1:1 with RS-232C Ports
• Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link, N = 1 only
• OMRON Cables with Connectors: XW2Z-200T (2 m)
XW2Z-500T (5 m)
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit PT
Signal Pin Pin Signal
FG Hood Hood FG
FG 1 1 –
SD 2 2 SD
Built-in RD 3 3 RD RS-232C
RS-232C RS RS interface
4 4
Port
CS 5 5 CS
5V 6 6 5V
DR* 7 7 –
ER* 8 8 –
SG 9 9 SG
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
* DR and ER signals are not supported by the NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
 Connecting a PT and a PLC with 1:N NT Link and RS-422A/485 Ports Using
4-wire, RS-422A Communications
• Communications mode: 1:N NT Link, N = 1 only
NB-series or NS-series PT
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

RS-422A Conversion
Unit (NS-AL002)
(CP1W-CIF11/12)
1:N NT Link
App
Note Do not use NS-AL002, when connecting the built-in RS-422A port of the NB-series PT.
 Wiring Example

NB-series or
CP1E NS-series PT
DIP switch for operation settings NS-AL002
DIP switch settings
SW1 Terminating resistance ON/OFF ON (terminating resistance) ON (RS/CS control) SW1 RS/CS control or always ON
SW2 2/4-wire selection OFF (4-wire connection) OFF (4-wire connection) SW2 2/4-wire selection
SW3 2/4-wire selection OFF (4-wire connection) OFF (4-wire connection) SW3 2/4-wire selection
SW4 Not used OFF ON (terminating resistance) SW4 Terminating resistance ON/OFF
SW5 RD control OFF (no control)
SW6 SD control OFF (no control)
RDB+
RDB+
SDB+
SDB+
RDA-
RDA-
SDA-
SDA-
FG
FG
Note Do not use NS-AL002, when connecting the built-in RS-422A port of the NB-series PT.

Appendices
No-protocol Communications
 Connecting RS-232C Ports 1:1

• Communications Mode: No-protocol
Example: Connections to E5CK Controller
CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit

Built-in RS-232C Port or RS-232C
Option Board Example: OMRON E5CK Controller
RS-232C RS-232C: Terminal block
Signal Pin shielded cable
FG 1 Terminal Signal
SD 2 13 SD
RD 3 14 RD
RS 4 1 SG
CS 5
DR* 7
ER* 8
SG 9
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
 Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports 1:1 with 2-wire Connections

N/NA-type CPU Unit

Device supporting
RS-422A/485
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit communications (2-wire)
Signal Pin Signal

RS-422A/485
SDA- 3 A(-) interface
RS-422A/485 SDB+ 4 B(+)
Option Board RDA- 1
RDB+ 2
FG 5
Terminal block
NS1-type CPU Unit Device supporting

RS-422A/485
CP1E NS1-type CPU Unit communications (2-wire)
Signal Signal
RS-422A/485
Built-in
A- A(-) interface
RS-485 Port
B+ B(+)
FG
Terminal block

Appendices
 Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports 1:1 with 4-wire Connections

Device supporting RS-422A/485
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit communications
Signal Pin Signal
RS-422A/485 SDA- 3 RDA RS-422A/485

Option Board SDB+ 4 RDB interface
RDA- 1
SDA
RDB+ 2
FG 5 SDB
4-wire Terminal block

Terminating
resistance:
ON
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
NT-AL001 communications
Shield
Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal
RS-232C
1 GRD NC 1 FG
2 SG SD 2 SD
3 SDB RD 3 RD RS-232C
4 SDA RS 4 RS interface
5 RDB CS 5 CS
6 RDA 5V 6
7 CSB DR 7 DR
Shield 8 CSA ER 8 ER
SG 9 SG
RS-422 RS-232
Terminal block D-sub, 9-pin (+)5V
connector (male) (−)Power
DIP SW
SW1-1: ON
SW1-2: ON(Terminating resistance)
SW1-3: OFF
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

SW1-4: OFF
SW1-5: OFF
SW1-6: ON
Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function

• Communications mode: Modbus-RTU Easy Master
App
N/NA-type CPU Unit 3G3MV
CP1W-CIF11/12
RS485 Signal
Control circuit
terminal block
(communications
50m max. terminals)
2-wire
CP1W-CIF11/12
NS1-type CPU Unit 3G3MV
Built-in RS-485 Port

RS485 Signal
Control circuit
terminal block
FG (communications
50m max. terminals)
Built-in RS-485 Port

Appendices
Serial PLC Links

• Communications mode: Serial PLC Link (Master) or Serial PLC Link (Slave)
 Connection with RS-232C Ports

RS-232C connection is also possible when using a Serial PLC Link to connect two CP1E N/NA(S)-
type CPU Units.
CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit

Built-in RS-232C Port or RS-232C Built-in RS-232C Port or RS-232C
Option Board Option Board

FG 1 1 FG
SD 2 2 SD
R R
RD 3 3 RD S
S
4 4 RS
-
RS
-
2 2
3 CS 5 5 CS 3
2 5V 2
5V 6 6 C
C
DR* 7 7 DR*
ER* 8 8 ER*
SG 9 9 SG
• Wiring Example Using RS-422A/485 Ports with RS-422A, 4-wire Connections
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 0) CJ1M CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 1)
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit
DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance) SW1: OFF (no terminating resistance) SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: OFF (4-wire connection) SW2: OFF (4-wire connection) SW2: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW3: OFF (4-wire connection) SW3: OFF (4-wire connection) SW3: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW4: OFF SW4: OFF SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD)
SW6: OFF (no RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD)
Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the
built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E
NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface

Signal name
Signal name
Signal name
RDB+
RDB+
RDB+
SDB+
SDB+
SDB+
RDA–
RDA–
RDA–
SDA–
SDA–
SDA–
FG
FG
FG
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Shield

Appendices
• Wiring Example Using RS-422A/485 Ports with RS-485, 2-wire Connections

CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 0) CJ1M CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 1)
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit
DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance) SW1: OFF (no terminating resistance) SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: ON (2-wire connection) SW2: ON (2-wire connection) SW2: ON (2-wire connection)
SW3: ON (2-wire connection) SW3: ON (2-wire connection) SW3: ON (2-wire connection)
SW4: OFF SW4: OFF SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD)
SW6: ON (with RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD)
Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the
built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E
NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface

Signal name
Signal name
Signal name
RDB+
RDB+
RDB+
SDB+
SDB+
SDB+
RDA–
RDA–
RDA–
SDA–
SDA–
SDA–
FG
FG
FG
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Shield
NS1-type CPU Unit
CP1E N□□S1-type CPU Unit CP1E NS1-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 0) CJ1M CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 1)
Built-in RS-485 port Built-in RS-485 port
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit
DIP SW DIP SW
DIP SW
Terminating resistance：OFF Terminating resistance：OFF
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: ON (2-wire connection)
SW3: ON (2-wire connection)
SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD)
SW6: ON (with RS control for SD)
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

RS-485 port RS-485 port RS-422A/485 interface
Signal name
RDA−
RDB＋
Signal name
Signal name
SDA−
SDB＋
FG
A−
B＋
A−
B＋
FG
FG
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
App

Appendices
A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring
Recommended RS-232C Wiring
We recommend the following wiring method for the RS-232C, especially in environments prone to
noise.
1 Use shielded twisted-pair cables for the communications cables.

• Recommended RS-232C Cables
Model numbers Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product) Fujikura Ltd.
AWG28x5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product) Hitachi Cable,
CO-MA-VV-SB 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product) Ltd.
2 Combine a signal wire and SG (signal ground) wire in a twisted-pair cable.

At the same time, bundle the SG wires at the connectors on Option Board and the remote
device.
3 Connect the shield of the communications cable to the hood (FG) of the RS-232C connector on
the Option Board.
At the same time, ground the ground terminal (GR) of the CPU Unit to 100 Ω or less.
 Connection Example
Example: Twisted-pair Cable Connecting SD-SG, and RD-SG Terminals in Host Link Mode
CPU Unit IBM PC/AT or compatible
FG 1 1 CD SG signal wires
SD 2 2 RD
RS-232C RD 3 3 SD RS-232C
interface RS 4 4 ER interface Bundle the SG wires
CS 5 5 SG
5V 6 6 DR Aluminum foil
DR* 7 7 RS
ER* 8 8 CS
SG 9 9 CI
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin connector (female) XM2S-0911-E

Appendices
Note The hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the CPU Unit.
Therefore, the FG is grounded by grounding the power supply ground terminal (GR). Although there is con-
ductivity between the hood (FG) and pin 1 (FG), connect the shield to both the hood and pin 1 to reduce the
contact resistance between the shield and FG and thus provide better noise resistance.
: Power supply ground terminal
Ground to RS-232C Option Board

100Ω or less
Wiring Connectors
Use the following steps to wire connectors.
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each step.
 Shield Connected to Hood (FG)

1 Cut the cable to the required length.
2 Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife.
Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25mm (RS-422A)
40mm(RS-232C)
3 Trim off the braided shield using scissors.
App
10mm
4 Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper.

A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring
5mm
5 Fold back the braided shield.
6 Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded shield.
Aluminum foil tape

Appendices
 Shield Not Connected to Hood (FG)
1 Cut the cable to the required length.
2 Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife.
Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25mm (RS-422A)
40mm(RS-232C)
3 Trim off all the braided shield using scissors.
4 Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper.
5mm
5 Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield was removed.
Adhesive tape
 Soldering
1 Place a heat-shrinking tube on each conductor.
2 Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector terminals.
3 Completely solder each conductor.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Inside diameter:
1.5 mm, l = 10

Appendices
4 Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrinking tube
 Assembling Connector Hood

Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
End connected to FG End not connected to FG

Aluminum foil tape
Grounding plate
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring

Use the following wiring methods for RS-422A/485 to maintain transmission quality.
 CP1W-CIF11/12 RS-422A/485 Wiring
1 Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.

• Recommended RS-422A/485 Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
2 Connect the shield of the communications cable to the FG terminal on the RS-422A/485 Option
App
Board.
At the same time, ground the ground terminal (GR) of the CPU Unit to 100 Ω or less.
 Built-in RS-485 Wiring (CP1E-NS1D-)

Applicable Cables
Solid wire or ferrules can be used.
• Recommended RS-485 Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
• Recommended ferrules
Manufacturer Model numbers Applicable wire
Phoenix Contact AI-0.25-12 AWG24
Note Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.

Appendices
Terminal Wiring
When wiring the Rs-485 terminal block, treat either solid or stranded wires directly.
2-conductor shielded
twisted-pair cable
Release button
• To make the connection, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and push
the line in while the lock is released. Remove the screwdriver and lock it inside.
• To disconnect the wiring, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and pull
the line out while the lock is released.
Note 1 Note 1 Ferrules with/without plastic sleeve cannot be used.
2 When using stranded wire, twist the core so that the barbed wires cannot protrude.
3 Do not solder-plate the end of cable.
The screwdriver shown below is recommended for wiring.
SZS 0.4×2.5 Phoenix Contact
Side Front
0.4mm 2.5mm

Using the Built-in RS-485 Port or CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Not Isolated)
Use the Built-in RS-485 Port or CP1W-CIF11 only when there is no difference in electrical poten-
tial between devices. Connect the shield on the communications cable at both ends to the FG
terminals on the RS-422A/485 terminal blocks to ground it. Do not allow the communications dis-
tance to exceed 50m.
Using the CP1W-CIF12 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Isolated)

Use the CP1W-CIF12 if there is a difference in electrical potential between devices or for long
distance communications (500 m max.).
Connect the shield on the communications cable only at the Option Board to ground it. If the
shield is connected at both ends of the cable when there is a difference in electrical potential, the
devices may be damaged.

Appendices
 Connection Examples
2-Wire and 4-Wire Transmission Circuits

The transmission circuits for 2-wire and 4-wire connections are different, as shown in the following
diagram.
• CP1W-CIF11/12
Example of 4-Wire Connections Example of 2-Wire Connections
2/4-wire switch 2/4-wire switch

(DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit (DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit
Option Board Option Board Not connected
• CP1E-NS1D-
Example of 2-Wire Connections

2-wire switch
(DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit
Built-in RS-485 Port Not connected

Use the same type of transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes.
App
Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is set to 2-wire.
Wiring Example: 1:1 Connections

• Two-wire Connections

RS-422A/485 Option Board Remote device
Pin Signal Signal
3 SDA- A(–)
4 SDB+ B(+)
1 RDA- FG
2 RDB+ Ground the shield at one end
5 FG Shield when using CP1W-CIF12.
CP1E NS1-type CPU Unit

Built-in RS-485 Port Remote device
Signal Signal
A- A(–)
B+ B(+)
FG FG
Shield

Appendices
• Four-wire Connections
RS-422A/485 Option Board Remote device
Pin Signal Signal

3 SDA- RDA
4 SDB+ RDB
1 RDA- SDA
2 RDB+ SDB
5 FG FG
Shield Ground the shield at one end
when using CP1W-CIF12.
A-3-3 Converting the Built-in RS-232C Port to RS-422A/485

Use one of the following Conversion Units to convert a built-in RS-232C port to an RS-422A port for a
CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
• CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit
Maximum distance: 50 m, convertible to RS-422A or RS-485.
• NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit:
Maximum distance: 500 m, convertible to RS-422A only.
Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit

The CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Conversion Unit is used to convert an RS-232C port to RS-422A/485.
It is directly connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E N/NA-type CPU Unit.
The Conversion Unit is not insulated, so the maximum distance for RS-422A/485 is 50 m.
Note CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
 Appearance
 Electrical Specifications
• RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Signal
RDA-
RDB+
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG
SDA-
SDB+
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG FG
• RS-232C Connector
RS-232C port Connector pin

Pin Signal
arrangement
1 FG
+5V 6
1 FG 2 RD
2 RD
–7 3 SD
3 SD
–8
4 CS 4 CS
SG(0V) 9
5 RS 5 RS
6 +5V
7,8 NC
9 SG(0V)
Hood NC*

Appendices
* The hood and the connector hood to which it is connected will have the same electrical potential.
 DIP Switch for Operation Settings

Pin Setting ON OFF
1 Terminating resistance Terminating resistance connected Terminating resistance
selection (both ends of transmission path) not connected
2 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1 2-wire connections 4-wire connections
3 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1 2-wire connections 4-wire connections
4 Not used. − −
5 RS control selection for RD*2 RS control enabled RS control disabled
(Data always received.)
6 RS control selection for SD*3 RS control enabled RS control disabled
(Data always sent.)
*1 Set both pins 2 and 3 to either ON (2-wire) or OFF (4-wire).

*2 To disable the echo-back function, set pin 5 to ON (RS control enabled).
*3 When connecting to a device on the N side in a 1: N connection with the 4-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS
control enabled).
Also, when using 2-wire connections, set pin 6 to ON (RS control enabled).
 Dimensions
5.8 38.8 18.2

34.0
NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit

The NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit is used to connect a device with RS-232C termi-
nals to a device with RS-422A terminals.
App
A cable is used to connect the built-in RS-232C port of the CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit.
The Conversion Unit is insulated, so the maximum distance for RS-422A is 500 m. A-3-3 Converting the Built-in RS-232C Port to
 Appearance
RS-422A/485

Appendices
 DIP Switch Setting

The NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit has a DIP switch for setting RS-422A/485
communications conditions.
When connecting the Serial Communications Option Board, refer to the DIP switch settings shown
in the following table.
Pin Function Factory setting
1 Not used. (Leave set to ON.) ON
2 Built-in terminating resistance setting ON
ON: Connects terminating resistance, OFF: Disconnects terminating resis-
tance
3 2/4-wire setting OFF
4 2-wire: Set both pins to ON, 4-wire: Set both pins to OFF OFF
5 Transmission mode setting* ON
6 Constant transmission: Set both pins to OFF. OFF
Transmission performed when CS signal in RS-232C interface is at high level:
Set pin 5 to OFF and pin 6 to ON.
Transmission performed when CS signal in RS-232C interface is at low level:
Set pin 5 to ON and pin 6 to OFF.
* When connecting to a CP-series CPU Unit, turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6.
 Application Example
CP1E N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit RS-232C/RS422A Conversion Unit
Built-in RS-232C Port or RS-232C
Option Board NT-AL001 Remote device
RS-422
Pin Signal RS-232C Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal
2 SD 3 RD SDA 4 RDA
3 RD 2 SD SDB 3 RDB
4 RS 4 RS RDA 6 SDA
5 CS 5 CS RDB 5 SDB
6 +5V 6 +5V GRD 1
7 DR* 7 DR
8 ER* 8 ER
9 SG 9 SG
Hood FG Hood FG Remote device
Shield
Signal
(See note)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
FG
Note The following cables can be used for this connection.

It is recommended that one of these cables be used to connect the RS-232C port on the Option Board
to the NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422 Conversion Unit.
Length Model numbers
70cm XW2Z-070T-1
2m XW2Z-200T-1

Appendices
 Wiring for the Recommended Cables (XW2Z-070T-1 or XW2Z-200T-1)

Wiring with XW2Z-0T -1 (10 conductors)
SYSMAC PLC NT-AL001 end (inside NT-AL001)
Pin Signal Signal Pin

*Arrows indicate
1 FG Not used. 1 signal directions
2 SD RD 3
3 RD SD 2
4 RS RS 4
5 CS CS 5
Loopback
6 +5V +5V 6
7 DR* DR 7
8 ER* ER 8
Loopback
9 SG SG 9
Hood FG FG Hood
Shield
Note The hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the CPU Unit.
Therefore, FG is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the power supply ter-
minal block.

• The XW2Z-0T-1 Connecting Cables for the NT-AL001 Link Adapter uses special wiring for
the DS and RS signals.
Do not use these signals with other devices.
Connecting this cable to other devices can damage them.
• Always turn ON the terminating resistance if the node is at the end of the RS-422A/485 trans-

mission path.
A-3-4 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring

Observe the following precautions when wiring communications cables.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O wires and other control wires
in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
Low-current cables
App
Communications
cables
300 mm min.
Control cables
PLC power supply
A-3-4 Reducing Electrical Noise for External
and general control
circuit wiring 300 mm min.
Power cables
Wiring
Power lines
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each
other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply
and general control
Communications circuit wiring Power lines Steel sheet metal
cables
200 mm min.

Appendices

Index
A Analog Output Unit .................................................8-17
Analog adjuster .......................................................3-3, 3-8 CPU Unit ............................ 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-19
Analog adjusters ............................................................ 3-3 Expansion I/O Unit .................................................2-20
Analog I/O Unit....................................................2-15, 8-27 Expansion Unit .......................................................2-20
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 Temperature Sensor Unit .......................................8-57
DIP Switch settings ................................................ 8-35 CX-Programmer.............................................................4-2
Wiring ............................... 8-35, 8-49, A-31, A-33, A-34 Installation ................................................................4-7
Words allocation............................................8-37, 8-51 Uninstallation............................................................4-7
Analog Input Unit ..................................................2-15, 8-2 CX-Programmer connection error................................6-18
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 Cycle time exceeded error ....................................6-5, 6-10
Part names and functions ........................................ 8-2 D
Specifications ........................................................... 8-3
Wiring ............................................................. 8-8, A-28 Dimensions ....................................................................5-7
Words allocation..................................................... 8-10 CPU Unit ................................................................. A-2
Analog Output Unit..............................................2-15, 8-15 Expansion I/O Unit .................................................. A-8
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 Expansion Unit ...................................................... A-10
Part names and functions ...................................... 8-15 Option Boards ......................................................... A-5
Specifications ......................................................... 8-16 RS-422A Conversion Unit ..................................... A-51
Wiring ..................................................8-22, A-29, A-30 DIN Track..............................................................2-10, 5-9
Words allocation............................................8-22, 8-23 DIN Track installation.....................................................5-8
DIP switch
B Analog I/O Units .....................................................8-35
Backup memory error ...........................................6-6, 6-12 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit .....................................8-93
Backup time ................................................................... 1-2 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit ..................... A-52
Battery...................................................................2-10, 7-2 RS-422A Conversion Unit ..................................... A-51
Replacing ................................................................. 7-7 RS-422A/485 Option Board....................................3-21
Service life................................................................ 7-5 Temperature Sensor Unit .......................................8-58
Battery error ..........................................................6-6, 6-13 DM Area capacity.......................1-2, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
Built-in RS-232C port .................................... 3-3, 3-8, A-50 E
C EMC Directive ................................................................-23
Checking errors.............................................................. 6-2 End Plate ............................................................2-10, 5-10
Communications error Error log information ......................................................6-3
Built-in RS-232C port ............................................... 6-5 Error processing flowchart .............................................6-6
Peripheral USB port ................................................. 6-5 E-type CPU Unit.............................................................1-2
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit ..................................2-16, 8-92 Basic system configuration.......................................2-2
Dimensions ........................................................... A-11 E10/14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units ..............................3-2
Node number Determination and E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units ...................3-7
DIP switch settings .............................................. 8-96 Maximum number of I/O Points..............................2-13
Part names and functions ...................................... 8-92 Models......................................................................2-6
Specifications ......................................................... 8-94 Expansion I/O Unit ..............................................3-28, 3-31
Wiring ........................................................... 8-96, A-38 Common I/O specifications ....................................3-33
Words allocation..................................................... 8-95 Dimensions.............................................................. A-8
Connecting by USB........................................................ 4-8 Models....................................................................2-14
Connecting Expansion (I/O) Units................................ 5-12 Part names and functions.......................................3-31
CPU error..............................................................6-5, 6-11 Terminal arrangements ..........................................3-32
CPU Unit Wiring .................................................................... A-21
Common I/O specifications .................................... 3-13 Expansion Input Unit
Dimensions ............................................................. A-2 Part names and functions.......................................3-28
E10/14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units .............................. 3-2 Terminal arrangements ..........................................3-28
E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units ................... 3-7 Expansion Output Unit
Model numbers ........................................................ 2-4 Part names and functions.......................................3-29
Models...................................................................... 2-4 Terminal arrangements ..........................................3-30
Part names and functions .................................3-2, 3-7 Expansion system configuration ..................................2-13
Terminal arrangements ...................................3-5, 3-10 Expansion Unit
Unit version ............................................................ 2-11 Dimensions............................................................ A-10
Wiring .................................................................... A-12 Models....................................................................2-15
Current consumption Wiring .................................................................... A-28
Analog I/O Unit ....................................................... 8-29 External power supply capacity ..........................2-16, 2-18
Analog Input Unit...................................................... 8-3
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) Index-1

F Non-fatal errors
Fail-safe circuits ............................................................ 5-2 Backup memory error ..................................... 6-6, 6-12
FAL error .............................................................. 6-6, 6-12 Battery error.................................................... 6-6, 6-13
FALS error............................................................ 6-5, 6-10 FAL error......................................................... 6-6, 6-12
Fatal errors Option Board error .......................................... 6-6, 6-13
Cycle time exceeded error.............................. 6-5, 6-10 PLC Setup error.............................................. 6-6, 6-13
FALS error ...................................................... 6-5, 6-10 No-protocol communications....................................... A-40
I/O bus error ..................................................... 6-5, 6-8 Normal inputs .............................................................. 3-13
Memory error .................................................... 6-5, 6-8 Normal Outputs ........................................................... 3-16
Program error ................................................... 6-5, 6-9 NT Link ........................................................................ A-39
Too many I/O points error................................. 6-5, 6-8 Number of connected Units......................................... 5-13
Number of Expansion (I/O) Units connected
G .......................................................1-10, 2-13, 2-16, 5-13
Grounding........................................................... 5-15, 5-16 Number of simultaneously ON points.......................... 2-17
H O
High-speed counter ..................................................... 3-13 Operating environment.................................................. 4-4
Option Board ............................................................... 3-19
I Option Board error................................................ 6-6, 6-13
I/O bus error ........................................................... 6-5, 6-8 Option Board slot........................................................... 3-8
I/O Connecting Cable .................................................. 2-10 Option Boards
I/O wiring ..................................................................... 5-17 Dimensions .............................................................. A-5
Indicator.................................................................. 3-4, 3-9 Optional Products
Checking errors ....................................................... 6-2 Models ..................................................................... 2-9
Communications errors ......................................... 6-14 Output errors ............................................................... 6-16
CPU errors............................................................. 6-11 Output wiring ............................................................... 5-20
Errors ....................................................................... 6-5 P
Fatal errors .............................................................. 6-7
Non-fatal errors...................................................... 6-12 Part names and functions
Inductive loads ............................................................ 5-21 Analog Input Unit ..................................................... 8-2
Input errors .................................................................. 6-15 Analog Output Unit ................................................ 8-15
Inspection and maintenance ......................................... 7-3 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit..................................... 8-92
Installation and Wiring Products E10/14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.............................. 3-2
Models ................................................................... 2-10 E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units................... 3-7
Installation height .......................................................... 5-8 Expansion I/O Unit................................................. 3-31
Installing the software.................................................... 4-7 Expansion Input Unit.............................................. 3-28
Installing the USB Driver ............................................... 4-9 Expansion Output Unit........................................... 3-29
Interrupt inputs ............................................................ 3-13 Periodic inspection ........................................................ 7-2
Peripheral USB port ...............................3-3, 3-8, 4-8, 6-18
L PLC Setup error ................................................... 6-6, 6-13
Low Voltage Directive.................................................... -23 Power consumption....................................................... 1-9
Power supply error ........................................................ 6-5
M Precautions
Maximum number of I/O Points.......................... 1-10, 2-13 Precautions on Connecting Units .......................... 5-13
Memory error.......................................................... 6-5, 6-8 Precautions when connecting a two-wire DC sensor
Modbus-RTU Easy Master function ............................ A-41 ............................................................................ 5-19
Model numbers.............................................................. 2-4 Restrictions of CPU Unit with 16 or 32 I/O Points.. 3-34
Models Restrictions on system configuration ..................... 2-16
CPU Unit.................................................................. 2-4 Unit replacement precautions .................................. 7-4
Expansion I/O Unit................................................. 2-14 Program capacity ............. 1-2, 1-10, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
Expansion Unit ...................................................... 2-15 Program error ......................................................... 6-5, 6-9
Installation and Wiring Products ............................ 2-10 Programming devices.................................................... 4-2
Optional Products .................................................... 2-9 Pulse outputs............................................................... 3-17
Mounting hole pitch ..................................................... 5-10 PWM output................................................................. 3-17
N Q
N/NA-type CPU Unit...................................................... 1-2 Quick-response inputs................................................. 3-13
Basic system configuration ...................................... 2-3 R
E10/14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.............................. 3-2
E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units................... 3-7 Rotary switch............................................................... 8-59
Models ..................................................................... 2-8 RS-232C Option Board ........................................ 2-9, 3-20
Noise control ............................................................... 5-21 Dimensions .............................................................. A-5
External wiring .............................................. 5-22, A-53 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit
Relay output .......................................................... 5-22 Appearance ........................................................... A-51
DIP Switch for operation settings........................... A-52
Index-2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

RS-422A Conversion Unit CPU Unit ............................................................... A-12
Appearance ........................................................... A-50 DC Power Supply ...................................................5-16
Dimensions ........................................................... A-51 Expansion I/O Unit ................................................ A-21
DIP Switch for operation settings .......................... A-51 Expansion Unit ...................................................... A-28
Electrical specifications ......................................... A-50 Ground lines ..................................................5-15, 5-16
RS-422A/485 Option Board ..................................2-9, 3-21 I/O...........................................................................5-17
Dimensions ...................................................... A-6, A-7 Noise control ......................................................... A-53
Output.....................................................................5-20
S Serial communications .................................A-39, A-44
Serial communications................................................ A-39 Wiring connectors.................................................. A-45
Serial Communications Port ...............................3-19, 3-24 Wiring Diagrams ......................................................... A-12
Serial PLC Links ......................................................... A-42 Wiring ducts .................................................................5-11
Service life of relays Wiring for PTs ............................................................. A-39
CPU Unit ................................................................ 3-15 Wiring power supply............................................5-14, 5-16
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................. 3-34
Specifications
Analog Output Unit ................................................. 8-16
Characteristics ....................................................... 1-10
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit ..................................... 8-94
Functional specifications ........................................ 1-12
General specifications .............................................. 1-9
Support Software ......................................................... 2-12
Surface installation......................................................... 5-8
System configuration
E-type CPU Unit ....................................................... 2-2
Expansion system configuration ............................ 2-13
N/NA-type CPU Unit................................................. 2-3
Restrictions on system configuration ..................... 2-16
T
Temperature Sensor Unit.......................... 2-15, 2-16, 8-56
Dimensions ........................................................... A-11
DIP Switch Settings................................................ 8-58
Rotary Switch Setting ............................................. 8-59
Wiring ................................................. A-35, A-37, A-38
Words allocation..................................................... 8-61
Terminal arrangements
E10/14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units .............................. 3-2
E30/40, N30/40/60 or NA20 CPU Units ................... 3-7
Expansion Input Unit .............................................. 3-28
Expansion Output Unit ........................................... 3-30
Too many I/O points error .......................................6-5, 6-8
Two-decimal-place Mode............................................. 8-66
Types of errors............................................................... 6-5
U
Uninstalling the software................................................ 4-7
Uninstalling the USB Driver ......................................... 4-14
Unit replacement............................................................ 7-4
Unit version .................................................................. 2-11
W
WDT error ...................................................................... 6-5
Weight
CPU Unit .............................. 1-9, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
Expansion Unit ....................................................... 2-15
Wiring
AC Power Supply ................................................... 5-14
Analog I/O Unit ..............................................8-35, 8-49
Analog Output Unit ................................................. 8-22
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit ..................................... 8-96
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) Index-3

Index-4 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W479-E1-09
Revision code
Revision code Date Revised content

01 March 2009 Original production
02 June 2009 • Information added on CX-Programmer Micro PLC Edition version 8.2
upgrading to version 9.0.
• Information added on the features of pulse outputs and PWM outputs.
• Errors were corrected.
03 January 2010 Information added on E10/14, N14/60 and NA20 CPU Units.
04 June 2010 • CP1W-DA021 added for CP-series Expansion Units.
• Information added on CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board.
05 November 2011 Information added on NS(1)-type and ES-type CPU Units.
06 July 2013 Annotation added on that CJ1W-CIF11 cannot be connected to the built-in
RS-232C port of the CP1E NS(1)-type CPU Unit.
07 June 2014 Information added on CP1W-ADB21/DAB21V/MAB221 Analog Option Board.
08 October 2014 • CP1W-AD042 Analog Input Units, CP1W-DA042 Analog Output Units,
CP1W-MAD42/MAD44 Analog I/O Units and CP1W-TS003/TS004
Temperature Sensor Units added for CP-series Expansion Units.
• Errors were corrected.
09 January 2016 Added CPU Units with unit version 1.3.
CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) Revision-1

Revision-2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. © OMRON Corporation 2009 All Rights Reserved.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
Alexandra Technopark, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Singapore 119967 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. W479-E1-09 0116

CP1 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP1 e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP1 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

 CP-series CP1E CPU Units

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 1

· Wiring methods for the power supply

Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

5 Creating the Program

Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs

2 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W479)

CP1E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W480)

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 3

CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

4 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

Page Structure and Icons

5 Installation and wiring

DIN Track Installation

5-2-1 Installation Location

Precautions for Correct Use

Manual name CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 5-3

Precautions for Correct Use

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 5

6 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

3 Part Names and Functions

8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 7

CP1E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2

Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement......................................................................... 12

Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 14

Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 19

Operating Environment Precautions..................................................................... 22

Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 23

Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24

Section 1 Overview and Specifications

Section 2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

8 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

Section 4 Programming Device

Section 5 Installation and Wiring

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 9

Section 7 Maintenance and Inspection

Section 8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

10 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 11

Warranty, Limitations of Liability

See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

Limitation on Liability; Etc

12 CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479)

Errors and Omissions

CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W479) 13

Definition of Precautionary Information

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Correct Use

The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you

The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including